mm. 


i 


e..^;;*--^' 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/dynamicthoughtorOOatkirich 


Dynamic  Thought 

OR 

THE  LAW  OF  VIBRANT 
ENERGY 


BY 
WILLIAM  WALKER  ATKINSON 

AutTior  of  ^^Thought  Force;'*  *'Law  of  the  New  Tlwught;"  *'Nugget8  of 
the  New  Thoxtght;"  ^'Memory  Culture''  and  other  Scientific  and 
Occult  Works.   Associate  Editor  of  *^ Suggestion^"  1900- 
Oi;  Editor  of  **New  Thought,"  1901-05;  Co- 
Editor  of  *^The  Segnogram,"  isoe. 


"I  am  attacked  by  two  rery  opposite  lects— the  Scientists  and  the  Know- 
Kothings;  both  laugh  at  me,  calling  me  the  'Frogs'  Dancing  Master,'  but  I 
know  that  I  hare  discorered  one  o£  the  greatest  Forces  in  Nature." — Qalvini. 

UNIVERSITY  I 

OF  ^ 

^  1906 

THE  SEGNOGRAM   PUBLISHING  COMPANY 
LOS  ANGELES,  CALIFORNIA 


Copyright  1906 
By  The  Segnogram  Publishing  Company 


NoriCE. — This  book  is  protected  by  Copyright,  and  simulta- 
neous initial  publication  in  the  United  States  of  America,  Canada, 
Great  Britain,  France,  Germany,  Russia,  and  other  countries.  All 
rights  reserved. 


.V     OF  THE 

UNiVERSiT^f  I 


A  976 


A  FOREWORD 

This  is  a  queer  book.  It  is  a  marriage  of 
the  Ancient  Occult  Teachings  to  the  latest  and 
most  advanced  conceptions  of  Modern  Science 
— an  odd  union,  for  the  parties  thereto  are  of 
entirely  different  temperaments.  The  mar- 
riage might  be  expected  to  result  disastrously, 
were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  a  connecting  link 
has  been  found  that  gives  them  a  bond  of  com- 
mon interest.  No  two  people  may  truly  love 
each  other,  imless  they  also  love  something  in 
common — the  more  they  love  in  common,  the 
greater  will  be  their  love  for  each  other.  And, 
let  us  trust  that  this  will  prove  true  in  this  mar- 
riage of  Occultism  and  Science,  celebrated  in 
this  book. 

The  Occultists  usually  get  at  the  *^facts,'' 
first,  but  they  manage  to  evolve  such  out- 
rageous theories  to  explain  the  facts,  that  the 
world  will  have  none  of  their  wares,  and  turns 
to  Science  for  something  ** reasonable.'*  Sci- 
ence, proceeding  along  different  lines,  at  first 
denies  these  '^facts''  of  the  Occultists,  not  find- 
ing them  accounted  for  by  any  of  her  existing 

3 


A  I^OREWOEi) 

theories;  but,  later  on,  when  the  ^* facts'*  have 
been  finally  thrust  under  her  eyes,  after  re- 
peated attempts  and  failures,  she  says,  **0h, 
yes,  of  course  I' '  and  proceeds  to  evolve  a  new 
theory,  welding  it  with  other  scientific  hypoth- 
eses, and  after  attaching  a  new  label  thereto, 
she  proudly  exhibits  the  thing  as  **the  latest 
discovery  of  Modern  Science'* — and  smiles  in- 
dulgently, or  indignantly,  when  the  theory  of 
the  old  Occultists  is  mentioned,  saying,  ^*  Quite 
a  different  thing,  we  assure  you!*'  And  yet, 
in  all  justice,  be  it  said.  Science  usually  pro- 
ceeds to  find  much  better  ** proofs''  to  fit  the 
'^facts''  of  Occultism,  than  did  the  Occultists 
themselves.  The  Occultist  **sees  things,"  but 
is  a  poor  hand  at  ^* proofs" — while  the  Scien- 
tist is  great  on  ^^ proofs,"  but  so  often,  and  so 
long,  fails  to  see  many  things  patent  to  the  Oc- 
cultist who  is  able  to  *^look  within"  himself, 
but  who  is  then  unable  to  positively  and  scien- 
tifically ** prove"  the  facts.  This  is  easily  ex- 
plained— the  Occultist's  information  comes 
from  *' within,"  while  the  Scientists  comes 
from  without — and  ^* proofs"  belong  to  the 
** without"  side  of  Mentation.  And  this  is  why 
the  Occultists  so  often  make  such  a  bungle  re- 
garding ''proofs"  and  the  Scientist  fails  to  see 
''facts"  that  are  staring  the  Occultist  in  the 
face. 

4 


A  FOREWORD 

The  whole  history  of  Occultism  and  Science 
proves  the  above.  Take  the  phenomenon 
called  ** Mesmerism'*  for  instance — it  was  an 
old  story  with  the  Occultists,  who  had  been  for 
years  aware  of  it,  theoretically  and  practically. 
Mesmer  brought  it  into  general  prominence, 
and  Science  laughed  at  it  and  at  Mesmer 's 
**  fluid  *'  theory,  and  called  him  a  charlatan 
and  imposter.  Years  afterwards,  Braid,  an 
English  surgeon,  discovered  that  some  of 
the  facts  of  **  Mesmerism  *'  were  true,  and 
he  announced  his  discovery  in  a  scientific 
manner,  and  lol  his  views  were  accepted,  and 
the  thing  was  called  ** Hypnotism,'*  poor  old 
Mesmer  being  forgotten,  because  of  his  theory. 
Then,  after  a  number  of  years,  certain  other 
aspects  of  the  phenomenon  were  discovered, 
and  scientifically  relabelled  ^* Suggestion,*'  and 
the  re-naming  was  supposed  to  ** explain"  the 
entire  subject,  the  learned  ones  now  saying, 
**Pooh,  'tis  nothing  but  *  Suggestion, '  as  if  that 
explained  the  matter.  But  so  far,  they  have 
only  accepted  certain  phases  of  this  form  of 
Dynamic  Thought — for  that  is  what  it  is,  and 
there  are  many  other  phases  of  which  they  do 
not  dream. 

And  the  same  is  true  of  the  Occult  Teaching 
that  there  is  '*Life  in  Everything — the  Uni- 
verse is   Alive."    For  years,   this   idea   was 

5 


A  FOREWOED 

hooted  at,  and  we  had  learned  scientific  dis- 
courses upon  *'dead  Matter/'  ** inert  sub- 
stance/' etc.  But,  only  within  the  past  decade 
— ^yes,  within  the  last  five  years,  has  Science 
discovered  that  there  was  Life  in  Everything, 
and  that  even  in  the  Atom  of  mineral  and  chem- 
ical substance,  there  was  to  be  found  evidence 
of  Mind.  And  Science  is  beginning  to  plume 
itself  on  its  ^^ recent  discovery,''  and  to  account 
for  it  by  a  new  theory,  which  is  ^*  quite  a  dif- 
ferent thing,  we  assure  you,"  from  the  old 
Occult  Theory. 

And  the  same  will  prove  true  in  the  case  of 
the  Occult  Teaching  of  an  Universal  Mind,  or 
Cosmic  Mind.  Science  and  Philosophy  have 
long  laughed  at  this,  but  even  now  their  fore- 
most investigators  have  come  to  the  borders  of 
a  new  country,  and  are  gasping  in  amazement 
at  what  they  see  beyond  its  borders — they  are 
now  talking  about  *^Life  and  Mind  in  the 
Ether" — and  before  long  they  will  discard 
their  paradoxical,  absurd,  hypothetical  Ether, 
and  say,  *^We  are  bathed  in  an  Ocean  of  Mind" 
— only  they  will  insist  that  this  *' Ocean  of 
Mind"  is,  somehow,  a  *^ secretion  of  Matter" — 
something  oozing  out  from  the  pores  of  Matter, 
perhaps. 

But  Science  is  doing  valuable  work  in  the  di- 
rection of  investigation  and  experiment,  and  in 

6 


A  FOREWORD 

this  way  is  proving  the  principal  occult  teach- 
ings in  a  way  impossible  to  the  Occultists 
themselves. 

So,  you  see  that  both  Occultism  and  Science 
have  their  own  work  to  do — and  neither  can  do 
the  work  of  the  other.  Just  now  Science  is 
coquetting  with  the  question  of  **  Thought 
Transmission,  *'  etc.,  at  which  she  has  for  so 
long  sneered  and  laughed.  By  and  by  she  will 
accept  the  facts,  and  then  proceed  to  prove 
them  by  a  series  of  careful  and  conclusive  ex- 
periments, and  will  then  announce  the  result, 
solemnly,  as  *^a  triumph  of  Science.'' 

And  so,  in  this  book  you  will  find  a  marriage 
of  the  old  Occult  Teachings  and  Modern  Scien- 
tific Eesearches  and  Investigation.  And  the 
two  are  bound  together  with  that  bond  forged 
by  the  writer  of  the  book — heated  in  the  oven 
of  his  mind,  and  hammered  into  shape  with  his 
*^ untrained''  thought — a  crude,  clumsy  thing, 
but  it  serves  its  purpose — a  thing  called  ^^The 
Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought/* 

And  so,  this  is  what  this  Theory  is — a  *Hie 
that  binds/'  How  you  will  like  it  depends 
upon  yourself.  For  himself,  the  writer  does 
not  hesitate  to  say  that  he  is  pleased  with  his 
handiwork,  rude,  and  clumsy  though  it  may  be. 
He  believes  that  he  has  made  a  thing  that  will 
stand  wear  and  tear,  and  that  though  it  be  not 

.7. 


A  FOREWORD 

beautifully  finished,  it  ^Vill  serve,''  and  **be 
useful/'    And  that  is  the  main  thing,  after  all. 
And,  then,  perhaps,  some  may  see  beauty  in  the 
very  crudeness  of  the  thing — may  see  that  it 
bears  the  loving  mark  of  the  hammer  that  beat 
it  into  shape — may  recognize  that  over  it  has 
passed  the  caress  of  the  hand  that  made  it — 
and  in  that  seeing  there  may  come  the  recogni- 
tion of  a  beauty  that  is  beyond  ^^prettiness." 
WILLIAM  WALKER  ATKINSON. 
Los  Angeles,  California, 
February  16, 1906, 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER.  PAGE. 

I.  "In  the  Beginning" 11 

II.  Things  as  They  Are 20 

III.  The  Universality  of  Life  and  Mind 30 

IV.  Life  and  Mind  Among  the  Atoms 41 

V.  The  Story  of  Substance 61 

VI.  Substance  and  Beyond 75 

VII.  The  Paradox  of  Science 96 

VIII.  The  Forces  of  Nature 109 

IX.  Eadiant  Energy 121 

X.  The  Law  of  Attraction 135 

XL  The  Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought 154 

XII.  The  Law  of  Vibrant  Energy 171 

XIII.  The  Kiddle  of  the  Sphinx 182 

XIV.  The  Mystery  of  Mind .200 

XV.  The  Finer  Forces  of  the  Mind 206 

XVI.  Thought  in  Action 219 


''A  fire -mist  and  a  planet, 

A  crystal  and  a  cell, 
A  jelly-fish  and  a  saurian. 

And  caves  where  the  cave-men  dwell  j 
Then  a  sense  of  law  and  beauty. 

And  a  face  turned  from  the  clod, — 
Some  call  it  Evolution, 

And  others  call  it  God." 

**Like  tides  on  a  crescent  sea -beach, 

When  the  moon  is  new  and  thin, 
Into  our  hearts  high  yearnings 

Come  welling  and  surging  in, — 
Come  from  the  mystic  ocean 

Whose  rim  no  foot  has  trod, — 
Some  of  us  call  it  Longing, 

And  others  call  it  God.'* 

— W.  H.  Carruth. 


10 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 


CHAPTER  I 

**IN   THE  beginning" 

npHIS  book  will  deal  with  Life.  It  holds 
-■'  that  Life  is  Universal — that  it  is  inherent 
in,  and  manifests  (in  different  degrees)  in 
every  part,  particle,  phase,  aspect,  condition, 
place,  or  relationship,  in  the  World  of  Things 
that  we  call  the  Universe. 

It  holds  that  Life  manifests  in  two  aspects  or 
forms,  which  are  generally  found  by  us  in  con- 
nection and  co-operation  with  each  other,  but 
which  are  both,  probably,  an  expression  of 
some  One  Thing  higher  than  either.  These 
two  aspects  or  forms,  which  together  go  to 
make  up  or  produce  that  which  we  know  as 
**Life,'*  are  known  as  (1)  Substance  or  Mat- 
ter; and  (2)  Mind.  In  this  book  the  term 
'^Substance"  is  used  in  preference  to  '*Mat- 

11 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

ter/'  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  term  ''Matter*' 
has  become  closely  identified  with  certain  ideas 
of  the  Materialistic  school  of  thought,  and  has 
generally  been  regarded  by  the  public  in  the 
in  the  light  of  ''dead  matter,*^  whereas  this 
book  holds  that  all  Substance  is  Alive.  The 
term  "Mind*'  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "Mind, 
as  we  know  it/^  rather  than  as  "Mind,  as  it  is^' 
— or,  as  ' '  The  Cosmic  Mind.  *  *  In  some  places 
the  term  "  Mind-principle ' '  is  used  to  convey 
the  idea  of  "a  portion  of  the  Great  Principle  of 
Mind,  of  which  that  which  we  call  'Mind*  is 
but  a  small  and  but  partially  expressed  por- 
tion.'' 'These  terms  are  explained  and  illus- 
trated as  we  proceed.  The  aspect  of  "Energy 
or  Force'*  is  not  treated  as  a  separate  aspect 
or  form  of  Life,  in  this  book,  for  the  reason 
that  it  is  regarded  as  merely  a  manifestation 
of  Mind,  as  will  appear  as  we  proceed.  W6 
have  much  to  say  regarding  Motion,  but  the 
writer  has  tried  to  explain  and  prove  that,  at 
the  last,  all  Motion  results  from  Mental  Action, 
and  that  all  Force  and  Energy  is  Vital — Mental 
Force  and  Energy. 

This  book  is  not  intended  to  run  along  meta- 
physical or  theological  lines — its  field  is  differ- 
ent. And  so,  while  it  recognizes  the  impor- 
tance of  these  branches  of  human  thought,  still, 
it  finds  that  its  own  particular  field  is  sufficient 

13 


In  the  beginning 

to  engross  its  entire  attention,  for  the  moment, 
and,  consequently  the  aforesaid  subjects  shall 
not  be  touched  upon  except  incidentally,  in  con- 
nection with  the  subject  matter  of  the  book. 

This  being  the  case,  there  will  be  no  discus- 
sion of  the  *^  origin  of  Life'^ — the  question  of 
** creation'' — the  problems  of  theology  and 
metaphysics — the  riddle  of  the  ^*Why  and 
Wherefore''  of  Life  and  the  Universe.  The 
writer  has  his  own  opinions  upon  these  ques- 
tions, but  feels  that  this  is  not  the  place  in 
which  to  air  the  same.  For  the  purposes  of 
the  book,  he  prefers  to  leave  every  reader  to 
his  own  favorite  views  and  conceptions  regard- 
ing these  great  subjects,  feeling  that  the  views 
regarding  Life,  Mind,  Motion  and  Substance, 
that  are  advanced  in  this  book,  may  be  accepted 
by  any  intelligent  reader,  without  prejudice  to 
his,  or  her,  accepted  religious  or  philosophical 
views. 

The  writer  sees  that  this  something  called 
'*Life"  exists — he  finds  it  in  evidence  every- 
where. And  he  sees  it  always  in  its  aspects  of 
Substance  and  Mind.  And  he  feels  justified  in 
regarding  *^Life"  as  always  existing  in,  and 
manifesting  in  these  aspects — always  in  con- 
junction— at  least.  Life  '*as  we  know  it." 

And  he  finds  certain  apparent  Laws  of  Life 
in  operation  in  the  Universe  to  which  all  Life, 

13 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

in  all  of  its  aspects,  is  apparently  amenable. 
And  he  feels  justified  in  considering  these  Laws 
constant,  and  invariable,  and  unchangeable  so 
long  as  the  Universe,  as  it  now  is,  exists. 

And  with  the  above  views  in  mind,  this  book 
will  proceed  to  a  consideration  of  its  subject, 
without  attempting  to  peer  behind  the  veil  sepa- 
rating the  Universe  from  its  Causer — ^Life 
from  its  Source. 

But  in  justice  to  reader,  subject  and  writer, 
the  latter  has  thought  it  well  to  state  that  he 
does  recognize,  not  only  the  veil,  but  That- 
which-is-behind-the-Veil.  To  proceed  without 
this  statement  would  be  unfair  and  misleading. 
The  writer  wishes  to  be  understood  positively 
upon  this  point,  even  though  the  declaration 
may  bring  forth  the  derisive  jeer  of  those  who 
feel  that  they  **have  outgrown''  this  concep- 
tion; or  else  the  calm,  superior,  pitying  smile 
of  those  who  feel  that  the  Universe  is  its  own 
Cause  and  Effect.  By  ** Universe,''  the  writer 
means  ^*The  whole  body  of  Things"  (Web- 
ster). His  declaration  means  that  he  believes 
in  **That-which-is-above-Things." 

The  writer  prefers  not  to  attempt  to  **  de- 
fine" THAT  which  he  calls  '^The  Infinite." 
The  word  *' Infinite"  means  *  Without  limit  in 
time,  space,  power,  capacity,  knowledge  or  ex- 
cellence" (Webster).    And  to  ''define"  is  to 

14 


IN  THE  BEGINNING 

**limif ;  *^mark  the  limits  of'^  *^mark  the  end 
of/'  etc.  The  term  ** define,'*  as  applied  to 
''The  Infinite/'  is  ridiculous — an  absurd  para- 
dox. The  writer  echoes  Spinoza's  statement: 
**To  define  God  is  to  deny  Him."  And  so 
there  shall  be  no  attempt  at  definition  or  lim- 
itation. 

But  the  human  mind,  in  considering  the  sub- 
ject, is  bound  by  its  own  laws  to  think  of  ''The 
Infinite"  as  Real,  and  actually  being  and  ex- 
istent, if  it  thinks  of  It  at  all.  And  if  it  thinks 
of  It  as  "Infinite,"  it  must,  by  its  own  laws, 
think  of  It  as  Causeless;  Eternal;  Absolute; 
Everywhere-present ;  AU-Powerf ul ;  All-Wise. 
The  human  mind  is  compelled  to  so  consider 
The  Infinite,  if  it  think  of  It  at  all.  But  even 
in  so  thinking  of  It  as  "being"  these  things,  it 
is  doing  something  like  "defining"  or  "limit- 
ing" It,  for  The  Infinite  must  not  only  "be" 
those  things,  but  it  must  "be"  so  much  more, 
that  "those  things"  are  but  as  a  grain  of  dust 
on  the  desert  as  compared  to  the  real  "Being" 
of  The  Infinite.  For  the  "things"  mentioned 
are  but  "finite"  or  "defined"  things — things 
possessed  by  the  Finite  Things — and,  at  the 
best  can  be  but  symbols  of  the  attributes  or 
qualities  of  The  Infinite;  even  the  words  "at- 
tributes" or  "qualities"  being  an  absurdity  as 
applied  to  The  Infinite.    This  view,  also,  must 

15 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

be  reported  by  the  human  reason,  if  it  thinks 
about  the  matter  at  all. 

The  final  report  of  the  human  reason  re- 
garding this  matter  is  that  it  is  insoluble  and 
unthinkable  to  that  reason,  in  its  final  analysis. 
This  because  the  human  reason  is  compelled  to 
use  terms,  concepts,  etc.,  derived  from  its  ex- 
perience with  finite  things,  and  therefore  has 
no  tools,  measurements,  or  other  appliances 
with  which  to  ^^ think.''  of  The  Infinite.  All 
that  it  can  do  is  to  report  that  it  finds  that  it 
has  limits  itself,  and  that  it  finds  beyond  those 
limits  That  which  it  cannot  define,  but  which  it 
is  justified  in  considering  as  Infinite,  and  su- 
perior to  all  finite  conceptions,  such  as  Time, 
Space,  Causation  and  Thought.  (The  idea  of 
Thought  being  finite,  equally  with  'Time,  Space 
and  Causation,  is  not  common,  by  the  writer  is 
compelled  to  place  it  in  that  category,  because 
it  is  clearly  under  the  laws  of  Time,  Space,  and 
Cause  and  Effect,  and  must  be  considered  as 
*^ finite.''  The  ** knowledge"  possessed  by  The 
Infinite  must  be  something  far  transcending 
that  which  we  know  as  the  result  of  **  mental 
operations, "  or  *  ^  thinking. ' ' ) 

Certain  fundamental  truths  seem  to  have 
been  impressed  upon  the  human  intellect,  and 
the  reason  is  compelled  to  report  in  accordance 
therewith.    But  an  analysis  of  these  funda- 

16 


IN  THE  BEGINNING 

mental  truths  is  futile,  and  the  attempt  only 
leads  one  into  wild  speculations.  The  only  ad- 
vantage that  comes  from  the  attempt  is  the 
strengthening  of  mental  muscle  of  those  who 
are  able  to  stand  the  strain  of  the  exercise ;  and 
the  fact  that  by  such  attempt  we  are  made 
aware  that  we  do  not  know,  and  cannot  know, 
by  reasons  of  the  nature  of  the  Intellect,  and 
are  thus  prevented  from  harboring  absurd  and 
childish  theories  about  the  Unknowable.  To 
know  that  we  do  not  know,  and  cannot  know,  is 
the  next  best  thing  to  actually  knowing. 

The  writer  does  not  wish  to  be  understood, 
that  the  limits  of  the  human  reason  are  unal- 
terably fixed.  On  the  contrary,  he  believes 
that  additional  fundamental  portions  of  Truth 
are  super-imposed  upon  the  mind  of  the  race 
from  time  to  time.  And  he  believes,  yes, 
knows,  that  there  are  regions  of  the  mind  that 
give  reports  higher  than  those  conveyed 
through  the  Intellect.  And  he  believes  that 
there  are  phases  of  knowledge  in  store  for 
Man  that  will  raise  him  as  much  higher  than 
his  present  position,  as  that  present  position  is 
superior  to  that  of  the  earthworm.  And  he  be- 
lieves that  there  Beings  in  existence  to-day,  on 
planes  of  Life  as  yet  undreamed  of  by  the  aver- 
age man,  who  far  transcend  Man  in  power,  wis- 
dom and  nature.    He  believes   that  Man  is 

17 


DYNAMIC  THOITGHI? 

merely  just  entering  into  his  kingdom,  and  does 
not  realize  the  grandeur  of  that  which  is  his 
Divine  Inheritance. 

It  will  be  as  well  to  mention  here  that  the 
classification  of  Mind  with  the  aspects  of  Life, 
in  conjunction  with  Substance,  and  Motion, 
does  not  mean  that  the  Ego  or  Man  is  a  ma- 
terial thing.  The  writer  believes  that  the  Ego 
is  a  transcendent  Being,  partaking  in  some 
wonderful  way  of  the  essence  of  The  Infinite — 
that  it  is  a  Soul — Immortal.  He  believes  that 
as  Paul  says,  ^*We  are  all  children  of  God,  hut 
what  we  shall  be  does  not  as  yet  appear.*' 
These  matters  shall  not  be  discussed  in  this 
book,  but  the  writer  wishes  to  make  himself 
clear,  in  order  to  prevent  misunderstanding. 
Again,  in  this  respect,  he  must  '*fly  in  the  face 
of  Materialism." 

But,  although  the  writer  expresses  his  belief 
in  the  existence  of  The  Infinite,  and  bases  his 
philosophy  upon  that  basis,  he  does  not  wish  to 
insist  upon  the  identification  of  his  conception 
with  that  of  any  other  particular  conception  of 
the  Source  of  Life.  Nor  does  he  insist  upon 
names,  or  terms,  in  connection  with  the  concep- 
tion. He  has  used  the  term,  **The  Infinite,'' 
because  it  seems  to  be  broader  than  any  other 
of  which  he  could  think,  but  he  uses  it  merely 
as  a  name  for  the  Un-Nameable.    So,  if  the 

18 


I 


IN  THE  BEGINNING 

reader  prefers,  he,  or  she,  may  use  the  terms : 
**God'^  ^^Deity'^  *^First  Cause^^  ^^Princi- 
ple'';  *^ Unknowable'';  ^* Infinite  and  Eternal 
Energy'';  ^^The  Thing-in-Itself";  *^The  Abso- 
lute";  or  any  of  the  other  countless  terms  used 
by  Man  in  his  attempt  to  name  the  Un-Name- 
able — to  describe  the  Un-Describable — to  de- 
fine the  Un-Definable. 

And  all  may  retain  their  ideas,  or  lack  of 
ideas,  regarding  the  relation  of  The  Infinite  to 
their  own  particular  religious  views,  or  lack  of 
views.  The  philosophy  of  this  book  need  not 
disturb  a  man's  religious  belief — ^nor  does  it  in- 
sist upon  the  man  holding  any  special  religious 
belief.  Those  are  matters  entirely  for  the  ex- 
ercise of  the  man's  own  reason  and  conscience. 
And  they  may  retain  their  own  pet  philosophy 
regarding  the  origin,  purposes  or  plan  of  the 
production  and  existence  of  the  Universe — this 
book  shall  not  meddle  with  their  metaphysics 
or  philosophy.  What  is  herein  offered  may  be 
assimilated  with  the  fundamental  ideas  of 
nearly  every  form  of  religious  or  philosophical 
belief,  it  being  in  the  nature  of  an  Addition 
rather  than  a  Subtraction,  or  Division.  Its 
philosophy  is  Construtcive  rather  than  De- 
structive. 


19 


CHAPTEE  II 

THINGS  AS  THEY  ARE 

T  N  our  last  chapter  we  considered  the  Source- 
•^  of -All-Things,  which  we  called  The  Infinite. 
In  this  chapter  we  shall  consider  the  All-Things 
itself,  which  men  call  The  Universe.  Note  that 
the  word  Universe  is  derived  from  the  Latin 
word  *^Unus,''  meaning  **One,''  and  ^^Versor/' 
meaning  **to  turn,''  the  combined  word  mean- 
ing, literally,  *^One  that  turns,  or  moves.''  The 
Latin  words  indicate  a  close  meaning,  namely. 
One  thing  in  motion,  turning  its  several  as- 
pects, and  assuming  many  changes  of  appear- 
ance. 

The  writer  does  not  intend  touching  upon 
theories  of  the  origin  of  the  Universe,  nor  of 
its  purpose,  or  of  any  design  in  its  production 
or  management,  nor  of  its  possible  or  probable 
end.  These  questions  do  not  belong  to  our  sub- 
ject, and  then  again,  as  was  said  in  the  last 
chapter,  speculation  regarding  it  is  devoid  of 
results,  and  leads  one  to  quicksands  and  bogs 
of  mental  reasoning,  from  which  it  is  difficult 

20 


THINGS  AS  THEY  ABE 

to  extract  oneself.    The  answer  to  the  Riddle 
of  the  Universe  rests  with  The  Infinite. 

But  it  is  different  with  the  case  of  the  mani- 
fested Universe  that  is  evidenced  by  our  senses. 
Science  is  a  different  thing  from  metaphysics, 
and  its  process  and  mode  of  work  are  along 
different  lines.  And,  much  knpwledge  of 
Things  may  be  obtained  from  a  consideration 
of  it — remembering  always,  that  its  knowledge 
is  confined  to  Things,  and  not  to  That-which-is-- 
back-of -Things.  And,  so  let  us  consider  the 
Universe  of  Things. 

Material  Science  has  held  that  the  Universe 
is  composed  of  two  principles,  (1)  Matter;  (2) 
Energy  or  Force.  Some  hold  that  these  two 
principles  really  are  aspects  of  the  same  thing, 
and  that  there  is  really  but  one  Principle,  one 
aspect  of  which  is  shape,  form,  etc.,  and  called 
Matter;  the  other  a  quality  manifesting  in  Mo- 
tion, which  quality  is  called  Force.  Others,  the 
most  radical,  hold  that  there  is  nothing  but 
Matter,  and  that  Force  and  Energy  is  but  a 
*  Equality,''  or  **  power,''  inherent  in  Matter.. 
Others  hold  that  Force  is  the  **real  thing''  and 
Matter  but  a  form  of  Force.  All  branches  hold 
to  the  idea  that  Matter  and  Energy  are  always 
found  together,  and  can  not  be  thought  of  sepa- 
rately. Matter  and  Force  are  held  to  be  Eter- 
nal, and  Infinite,  it  following  that  there  can  be 

'   21 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

no  addition  to,  or  subtraction  from  either;  all 
apparent  loss  and  gain,  creation  and  destruc- 
tion being  but  change  of  form  or  mode.  God 
is  declared  unnecessary,  and  the  Universe  is 
held  to  operate  according  to  certain  Laws  of 
Matter  or  Force  (either  or  both)  which  are  un- 
changeable and  immutable — eternal  and  always 
valid.  Mind  and  Thought  are  held  to  be  prod- 
ucts of  properties  of  Matter  or  Force  (one  or 
both),  secreted,  evolved,  or  produced  in  the 
Brain.  The  Soul  is  relegated  to  the  waste 
heap,  and  discarded  as  useless  in  the  new 
philosophy.  Moleschott  said,  **  Thought  is  a 
motion  of  Matter'';  and  Holhach,  that  ** Matter 
enjoys  the  power  of  thinking.''  ** Natural 
Laws"  are  held  to  be  sufficient  for  the  explana- 
tion of  all  phenomena,  although  ignoring  the 
fact  that  the  reason  has  never  before  formed 
the  conception  of  a  *^law,"  without  thinking  it 
necessary  to  think  of  a  ** law-maker,"  or  a 
power  to  enforce  and  administer  the  law.  How- 
ever, the  philosophers  hold  that  it  is  no  more 
difficult  to  think  of  such  a  law  than  to  try  to 
form  an  idea  of  Space  or  Eternity,  both  of 
which  are  unthinkable  to  the  human  reason,  but 
both  of  which  are  admitted  as  self-evident 
facts. 

But   notwithstanding   this   somewhat   crude 
and  **raw"  reasoning,  Material  Science  has  ac- 

^2 


THINGS  AS  THEY  ARE 

complished  a  wonderful  work  in  the  world,  and 
has  brought  to  light  facts  of  inestimable  value 
to  Man  in  mastering  the  material  world,  and  in 
forming  correct  ideas  of  the  solution  of  ma- 
terial difficulties.  The  facts  of  Material  Sci- 
ence enables  the  world  to  cheerfully  overlook 
its  theories.  And  even  the  theories  are  rapidly 
undergoing  a  change,  and,  as  we  have  stated, 
some  of  the  most  advanced  scientists  are  rapid- 
ly reaching  the  position  of  the  Occultists  and 
mystics,  bringing  with  them  a  mass  of  facts  to 
back  them  up,  to  exhibit  to  the  Occultists  who 
dealt  with  principles  rather  than  with  details, 
or  material  facts,  so  far  as  fundamental  theo- 
ries were  concerned.  Each  is  boring  his  way 
through  the  mountain  tunnel  of  the  Unknown, 
and  both  will  meet  in  the  centre,  their  lines 
meeting  each  other  without  a  variation.  But 
the  Occultists  will  call  the  tunnel-centre  Mind, 
and  the  scientists  will  call  it  Matter,  but  both 
will  be  speaking  of  the  same  thing.  And  the 
Causer  of  the  mountain  will  probably  know 
that  they  both  are  right. 

But,  we  are  speaking  of  the  new  school  of  ad- 
vanced Material  Science  now — ^not  of  the  old 
conservative  *'A11  is  Matter''  people,  who  have 
been  left  behind.  The  new  school  speaks  of 
Substance  now,  instead  of  Matter,  and  ascribes 
to  ** Substance''  the  properties  of  Matter,  En- 

83 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

ergy,  and  something  that  they,  call  Sensation, 
by  which  they  mean  Mind  in  a  crude  form,  and 
from  which  they  say  Mind  and  **SouP'  evolved. 

This  new  school  of  Scientists  are  very  differ- 
ent from  their  predecessors — they  are  less 
** hide-bound,''  and  far  from  being  so  *' cock- 
sure." They  are  seeing  Matter  melting  into 
Energy,  and  giving  signs  of  Sensation,  and 
they  are  beginning  to  feel  that,  after  all,  there 
must  be  a  Thing-in-Itself ,  that  is  the  real  basis 
of,  or  ^*real  thing"  in  Substance.  There  is 
heard  very  little  among  them  about  **dead  mat- 
ter"; ** blind  force";  or  of  the  *' mechanical 
theory"  of  Life  and  the  Universe.  Instead  of 
it  being  a  big  machine,  operated  under  mechan- 
ical laws,  with  Life  as  the  steam,  the  Universe 
is  beginning  to  be  regarded  as  somehow  filled 
with  Life,  and  Science  is  finding  new  examples 
of  Life  in  unexpected  quarters,  and  the  *'dead 
matter"  area  is  being  narrowed. 

Men  who  have  followed  the  advances  made 
by  recent  Science  are  holding  their  breaths  in 
awe  and  earnest  expectation — and  those  who 
are  pushing  the  inquiries  and  investigations  to 
the  furthest  extent  are  showing  by  their  eager 
faces  and  trembling  hands  that  they  feel  that 
they  are  very  close  to  the  border  line  separa- 
ting the  old  Materialism  from  a  New  Science 
that  will  give  Thought  and  Philosophy  a  new 

24 


THINGS  AS  THEY  ARE 

impetus  and  a  new  platform.  Such  men  are 
feeling  that  they  are  seeing  the  old  Matter 
melting  away  into  something  else — the  old 
theories  are  falling  apart  under  the  light  of 
new  discoveries — and  these  men  feel  that  they 
are  penetrating  a  new  and  hitherto  unexplored 
region  of  the  Unknown.  May  success  be  theirs, 
for  they  are  now  on  the  right  road  to  Truth. 

In  the  following  chapters  we  shall  see  fre- 
quent references  to  ** Science" — and  when  we 
use  the  word  we  shall  know  it  means  this  new 
school  of  Scientists,  rather  than  the  older 
school  that  is  now  being  superceded.  There  is 
no  conflict  between  True  Occultism  and  True 
Science,  notwithstanding  their  directly  oppo- 
site theories  and  ideals — they  are  merely  look- 
ing at  the  Truth  from  different  viewpoints — ^at 
different  sides  of  the  same  shield.  A  better 
day  is  coming,  when  they  shall  work  together, 
instead  of  in  opposition.  There  should  be  no 
partisanship  in  the  search  for  Truth. 

Things  have  worked  this  way:  Occultism 
would  enunciate  a  theory  or  principle— but 
would  not  attempt  to  prove  it  by  material  facts, 
for  it  had  not  gathered  the  facts,  having  found 
the  principle  within  the  mind,  rather  than  with- 
out. Then,  after  laughing  at  the  occult  theory 
or  principle,  Science  would  search  diligently 
for  material  facts  to  prove  an  opposite  theory, 

25 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

and  in  so  doing  would  unearth  new  facts  that 
would  support  the  Occultists  contention.  Then 
Science  would  discard  its  old  theory  (that  is, 
the  younger  men  would — the  old  ones,  never) 
and  proceed  to  proclaim  a  new  theory  or  prin- 
ciple, under  a  new  name,  and  backed  up  with 
a  mass  of  facts  and  experiments  that  would  cre- 
ate a  new  school  with  many  enthusiastic  fol- 
lowers. The  old  claim  of  the  Occultists  would 
then  be  forgotten  or  else  go  unrecognized  under 
its  old  name ;  or  disguised  by  the  fantastic  and 
bizarre  coverings  which  some  so-called  Occult- 
ists had  draped  around  the  original  Truth. 

But,  so  long  as  Truth  is  being  uncovered, 
what  matters  it  who  does  the  work,  or  by  what 
name  he  calls  his  school.  The  movement  is 
ever  forward,  and  upward — what  matter  the 
banner  under  which  the  armies  move? 

In  this  book  the  writer  will  advance  a  very 
different  theory  of  the  Universe  of  All-Things 
from  that  of  Modern  Science,  although  he  feels 
that  his  theory  may  easily  be  reconciled  with 
the  most  advanced  views  of  that  school. 

In  the  first  place,  as  he  has  stated  in  the  first 
chapter,  he  does  not  hold  that  the  Universe, 
as  we  know  it,  is  self-sufficient,  but  he  recog- 
nizes a  Something  back  of  all  phenomena  and 
appearances,  which  Something  he  calls  **The 
Infinite.*' 

^6 


THINGS  AS  THEY  ARE 

And  he  differs  very  materially  from  the 
views  of  those  who  claim  that  Mind  is  but  a 
property,  or  quality,  or  something  proceeding 
from  Matter  or  Force,  or  Matter-Force,  or 
Force-Matter — according  to  the  views  of  the 
respective  schools.  He  takes  an  entirely  dif- 
ferent and  opposite  position. 

He  holds  that  all  that  we  call  Matter  (or  Sub- 
stance) and  Mind  (as  we  know  it)  are  but  as- 
pects of  something  infinitely  higher,  and  which 
may  be  called  the  '* Cosmic  Mind.'*  He  holds 
that  what  we  call  **Mind''  is  but  a  partial  mani- 
festation of  the  Cosmic  Mind.  And  that  Sub- 
stance or  Matter  is  but  a  cruder  or  grosser 
form  of  that  which  we  call  Mind,  and  which  has 
been  manifested  in  order  to  give  Mind  a  Body 
through  which  to  operate.  But  this  view  he 
merely  states  in  passing,  for  he  makes  no  at- 
tempt to  demonstrate  or  prove  the  same,  his 
idea  being  that  it  forms  a  different  part  of  the 
general  subject  than  the  phase  of  **  Dynamic 
Thought,'*  to  the  consideration  of  which  this 
book  is  devoted. 

He  also  differs  very  materially  from  the  Ma- 
terialistic school  in  his  conception  of  Force  or 
Energy.  Instead  of  regarding  Force  as  a  dis- 
tinct principle,  and  as  something  of  which  Mind 
is  but  a  form,  he  walks  boldly  out  into  the  arena 
of  Scientific  Thought,  and  throwing  down  his 

37 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

gauntlet,  proclaims  his  theory  that  '*  There  is 
no  such  thing  as  Force  apart  from  Life  and 
Mind'' — *^A11  Force  and  Energy  is  the  product 
of  Life  and  Mind — all  Force,  Energy  and  Mo- 
tion result  from  Vital-Mental  Action — all 
Force,  Energy  and  Motion  is  Vital-Mental 
Force,  Energy  and  Motion." — **The  Mind 
abiding  in  and  permeating  all  Substance,  not 
only  has  the  power  to  Think,  but  also  the  power 
to  Act,  and  to  manifest  Force  and  Energy, 
which  are  its  inherent  and  essential  proper- 
ties." 

He  also  takes  the  position  that  Mind  is  in 
and  about  and  around  Everything.  And  that 
*^ Everything  is  Alive  and  Thinking."  And 
that  there  is  no  such  things  as  ^* Dead-Matter," 
or  ^* Blind-Force,"  but  that  all  Substance,  even 
to  the  tiniest  Particle,  is  permeated  with  Life 
and  Mind,  and  that  all  Force  and  Motion  is 
caused  and  manifested  by  Mind. 

He  holds  that  all  forms  of  Force,  Energy  and 
Motion,  from  the  Attraction  of  the  Particles  of 
Matter,  and  their  movements  in  response  there- 
to, up  to  the  Attraction  of  Gravitation,  and  the 
response  of  the  Worlds,  and  Suns,  and  Stars, 
and  Planets,  thereto — are  forms  of  Mental  En- 
ergy and  Force,  and  Action.  And  that  from 
the  tiniest  atom,  or  particle,  to  the  greatest  Sun 
— all   obey  this   Great  Action   of  Mind — this 

28 


THINGS  AS  THEY  ARE 

Great  Force  of  Mind — this  Great  Energy  of 
Mind — this  Great  Power  of  Mind. 

And  upon  this  rock — this  rock  of  Truth,  he 
believes  it  to  be — he  takes  his  stand,  and  an- 
nounces his  belief,  and  bids  all-comers  take 
notice  of  what  he  believes  to  be  a  germ-thought 
that  will  grow,  develop,  and  increase  so  that  it 
will  eventually  permeate  all  Scientific  Thought 
as  the  years  roll  along.  He  calls  this  theory 
*^The  Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought." 


29 


CHAPTER  m 

THE   UNIVERSALITY   OF   LIFE  AND  MIND 

^T^HE  writer  has  deemed  it  advisable  to 
-*-  preface  his  consideration  of  **Mind''  in 
itself,  as  well  as  of  Substance  and  Motion,  with 
two  chapters,  the  purpose  of  which  will  be  to 
demonstrate  that  Mind,  in  some  form  or  de- 
gree, is  to  be  found  in  connection  with  all 
Things — and  that  Everything  has  Life — and 
that  Mind  is  an  accompaniment  of  all  Life.  To 
many  the  term  *^Mind''  means  only  the  **  think- 
ing quality^'  of  man,  or  perhaps  of  the  lower 
animals;  and  '*Life'*  the  property  only  of  such 
organic  creatures.  For  that  reason  it  has  been 
deemed  advisable  to  point  out  that  Life  and 
Mind  are  found  even  in  the  lowest  forms  of 
substance — even  in  the  inorganic  world. 

In  this  chapter  and  from  now  on,  the  writer 
shall  use  the  term  *Hhe  Mind,"  etc.,  to  indicate 
the  particular  mental  principle  of  the  creature 
or  thing— the  bit  of  Mind  that  is  segregated 
from  the  rest,  and  which  each  person  thinks  of 
as  ''mine,"  just  as  he  thinks  of  my"  body,  as 
distinguished   from   the   universal    supply   of 

30 


I 


TBtE  UNIVERSALITY  OF  LIFlS  AND  MlNB 

Substance.    The  term  ^*Mind''  will  be  used  in 
its  Universal  sense. 

And,  the  writer  intends  to  use  Elmer  Gates' 
term,  *' Mentation/^  in  the  sense  of  *^ effort;  ac- 
tion; or  effect;  in  or  of,  the  Mind'' — in  short, 
''mental  process.''  The  word  is  useful  and 
when  one  has  learned  to  use  it,  he  will  prefer  it 
to  the  more  complicated  terms.  Remember, 
then,  please — ' '  Mentation ' '  means  * '  Mental 
Process."  Mentation  includes  that  which  we 
call  ''Thought,"  as  well  as  some  more  elemen- 
tary forms  of  mental  process  that  we  are  not  in 
the  habit  of  dignifying  by  the  term.  Thought, 
which  latter  we  usually  reserve  for  mental 
process  of  a  higher  order. 

So,  then,  "Mind"  is  the  something  of  which 
one's  particular  Mind  is  composed;  "The 
Mind"  is  that  something  possessed  by  one,  by 
and  through  which  he  "thinks";  "Mentation" 
is  mental  process;  and  "Thought"  is  a  ad- 
vanced kind  of  Mentation.  At  least,  the  said 
words  will  be  so  employed  in  this  book,  from 
now  on. 

In  this  chapter,  you  are  asked  to  consider  the 
fact  that  Life  is  Universal — that  Everything  is 
Alive.  And,  that  Mind  and  Mentation  is  an  at- 
tribute of  Life,  and  that,  consequently.  Every- 
thing has  Mind,  and  is  able  to  express  a  degree 
of  Mentation. 

81 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Forms  of  Life,  as  we  know  them,  are  always 
seen  as  possessing  two  aspects,  viz.,  (1)  Body 
(Substance);  and  (2)  Mentation  (Mind).  The 
two  aspects  are  always  found  in  combination. 
There  may  be  living  creatures  who  occupy 
bodies  of  so  fine  a  form  of  Substance  as  to  be 
invisible  to  the  human  senses — ^but  their  bodies 
would  be  **  Substance  ^ '  just  as  much  as  is  the 
**body''  of  the  granite  rock.  And,  in  order  to 
** think,''  these  beings  would  need  to  have  a 
material  something  corresponding  to  the  brain, 
though  it  be  finer  in  quality  than  the  rarest  gas, 
vapor,  of  electric  wave.  No  body,  without 
Mentation ;  no  Mentation  without  a  body.  This 
last  is  the  invariable  law  of  the  world  of 
Things.  And  naught  but  The  Infinite — That- 
which-is-above-Things — can  be  exempt  from 
that  law. 

In  order  to  grasp  the  idea  of  the  Universality 
of  Mind,  let  us  go  back  to  the  elementary  forms 
of  Things,  and,  step  by  step,  see  how  Mentation 
manifests  itself  in  every  point  on  the  scale 
from  mineral  to  man — using  **  bodies  ranging 
from  the  hardest  rock  to  that  finest  form  of 
known  Substance— the  Brain  of  Man.  As 
Mind  advances  in  the  scale  of  evolution  it  cre- 
ates its  own  working  instrument — the  body  (in- 
cluding the  brain)  and  shapes,  and  moulds  it  to 
admit  of  the  fullest  possible  expression  of  Men- 


THE  UNIVERSALITY  OF  LIFE  AND  MIND 

tation  possible  at  that  stage.  Mind  is  the 
moulder — body  (and  brain)  that  which  is 
moulded.  And  Inclination,  Desire,  and  Will, 
are  the  motive  powers  leading  to  gradual  Un- 
f oldment,  the  impelling  cause  being  the  craving 
for  Satisfaction. 

We  shall  make  our  journey  backward — and 
ignoring  Beings  higher  in  the  scale,  we  shall 
start  with  Man.  Leaving  out  of  the  considera- 
tion, for  the  moment,  the  fact  of  the  existence 
of  the  '^Ego,*'  or  *  ^Spirit''  of  Man,  which  is 
higher  than  Body  or  Mind — and  considering 
**the  Mind  of  Man,''  rather  than  the  Man  him- 
self— ^we  have  our  starting  point  on  the  down- 
ward journey  of  investigation.  We  need  not 
devote  much  attention  to  the  consideration  of 
the  Mind  of  Man,  at  this  stage,  although  we 
shall  have  much  to  do  with  it,  later  on. 

But  we  may  undertake  a  brief  consideration 
of  the  descending  degrees  of  Mentation  as 
manifested  by  Man,  as  we  pass  down  the  scale 
in  the  human  family,  considering  in  turn,  the 
Newtons,  Shakespeares,  Emersons,  Edisons, 
and  their  brothers  in  intellect,  in  the  field  of 
mathematics,  literature,  music,  art,  invention, 
science,  statesmanship,  business,  skilled  work- 
manship, etc.,  respectively.  From  these  high 
levels  we  pass  down,  gradually,  through  the 
strata  of  men  of  but  a  slightly  lower  degree  of 

33 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

intellect — down  through  the  strata  of  the  *^  av- 
erage man'' — down  through  the  strata  of  the 
ignorant  man — down  through  the  strata  of  the 
lowest  type  of  our  own  race  and  time — down 
through  the  strata  of  the  barbarian,  then  on  to 
the  savage,  then  on  to  the  Digger  Indian,  the 
Bushman.  What  a  difference  from  highest  to 
lowest — a  being  from  another  world  would 
doubt  that  they  were  all  of  the  same  family. 

Then  we  pass  rapidly  through  the  various 
strata  of  the  lower  animal  kingdom — from  the 
comparatively  high  degree  of  Mentation  of  the 
horse,  the  dog,  the  elephant,  etc.,  down  through 
the  descending  scale  of  the  mammals,  the  de- 
gree of  Mentation  becoming  less  marked  at 
each  step  of  the  journey.  Then  on  through  the 
bird  kingdom.  Then  through  the  world  of  rep- 
tiles. Then  through  the  family  of  fishes.  Then 
through  the  millions  of  forms  of  insect  life,  in- 
cluding those  wonderful  creatures,  the  ant  and 
the  bee.  Then  on  through  the  shell-fish  family. 
Then  on  through  the  community  of  sponges, 
polyps,  and  other  low  forms  of  life.  Then  on 
to  the  vast  empire  of  the  microscopic  creatures, 
whose  name  is  legion.  Then  on  to  the  plant 
life,  the  highest  of  which  have  *' sensitive  cells" 
that  resemble  brains  and  nerves — descending 
by  stages  to  the  lower  plant  life.  Then  still 
lower  to  the  world  of  bacteria,  microbes,  and 

34 


THE  UxXIVERSALITY  OF  LIFE  AND  MIND 

infusoria — the  groups  of  cells  with  a  common 
life — the  monera — the  single  cell.  The  mind 
that  has  followed  us  in  this  descent  of  life,  from 
the  highest  form  to  the  cell-like  *' thing*'  merely 
*^ existing'*  in  the  slime  at  the  bottom  of  the 
ocean,  has  acquired  a  sense  of  awe  and  sublim- 
ity not  dreamed  of  by  ''the  man  on  the  street." 

The  degrees  of  Mentation  in  the  lower  ani- 
mal kingdom  are  well  known  to  all  of  us,  there- 
fore, we  need  not  devote  much  time  to  their  con- 
sideration at  this  time.  Although  the  degree 
of  Mentation  in  some  of  the  lowly  forms  of 
animal  life,  are  scarcely  above  that  of  the  plant 
life  (in  fact,  are  inferior  to  that  of  the  highest 
plants),  still  we  have  accustomed  ourselves  to 
the  use  of  the  word  ''Mind*'  in  connection  with 
even  the  lowest  animals,  while  we  hesitate  to 
apply  the  word  to  the  plants. 

It  is  true  that  some  of  us  do  not  like  to  think 
of  the  lower  animals  "reasoning,"  so  we  use 
the  word  "Instinct"  to  denote  the  degree  of 
Mentation  of  the  lower  animal.  The  writer 
does  not  object  to  the  word ;  in  fact,  he  shall  use 
it  for  the  sake  of  distinguishing  between  the 
several  mental  states.  But,  remember,  "In- 
stinct" is  but  a  term  used  to  denote  a  lesser 
form  of  "Reason"— and  the  "Instinct"  of  the 
horse  or  dog  is  a  fine  thing  when  we  consider 
the  "Reason"  of  the  Bushman  or  Digger  In- 

35 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

dian.  However,  we  shall  not  quarrel  about 
words.  Both  **Eeason'^  and  ** Instinct''  mean 
degrees  or  forms  of  ** Mentation,''  the  word  we 
are  using.  The  lower  forms  of  animal  life  ex- 
hibit Mentation  along  the  lines  of  sex-action; 
feeling  and  taste.  Then  by  degrees  come  smell, 
hearing  and  sight.  And  then  something  very 
like  ** reasoning"  in  the  case  of  the  dog,  ele- 
phant, horse,  etc.  Mentation  everywhere  in 
the  animal  kingdom,  in  some  degree.  No  doubt 
about  Life  and  Mentation,  there. 

But  what  about  Mentation  and  Life  in  the 
plant  life?  All  of  you  admit  that  there  is 
**Life"  there — but  about  Mentation,  well,  let 
us  see !  Some  of  you  draw  the  line  at  the  word 
**Mind"  in  connection  with  plants,  although 
you  freely  admit  the  existence  of  **Life"  there. 
Well,  remember  our  axiom — **no  Life  without 
Mentation."    Let  us  try  to  apply  it. 

A  moment's  reflection  will  give  you  instances 
of  Mentation  among  the  plants.  Science  has 
called  it  ** Appetency,"  rather  than  admit 
*'Mind,"  the  word  *^ Appetency"  being  defined 
as  **an  instinctive  tendency  on  the  part  of  low 
forms  of  organic  life  to  perform  certain  acts 
necessary  for  their  well-being — such  as  to  se- 
lect and  absorb  such  particles  of  matter  as 
serve  to  support  and  nourish  them."  Well, 
that  looks  like  a  degree  of  Mentation,  doesn't 

36 


\ 


THE  UNIVEESALITY  OF  LIFE  AND  MIND 

itf  Many  young  animals  evidence  little  or 
nothing  more  than  ** Appetency''  in  suckling. 
We  shall  adopt  the  word  ^* Appetency''  to  des- 
ignate the  Mentation  in  plant-life.  Eemember 
this,  please. 

Anyone  who  has  raised  trees  or  plants  has 
noticed  the  instinctive  efforts  of  the  plant  to 
reach  the  water  and  sunlight.  Potatoes  in 
dark  cellars  have  been  known  to  send  forth 
shoots  twenty  feet  in  length  in  order  to  reach 
an  opening  in  the  wall.  Plants  have  been 
known  to  bend  over  during  the  night  and  dip 
their  leaves  in  a  pot  of  water  several  inches 
away.  The  tendrils  of  climbing  plants  seek 
for  the  stake  or  support,  and  &id  it,  too,  al- 
though it  has  been  changed  daily.  The  tendril 
will  retwine  itself,  after  it  has  been  untwisted 
and  bent  in  another  direction.  The  tips  of  the 
roots  of  the  tree  are  said  to  show  a  sensitive- 
ness almost  akin  to  that  of  the  limb  of  an  ani- 
mal, and  evidently  possess  something  akin  to 
nerve  matter. 

Duhamel  placed  some  beans  in  a  cylinder  of 
moist  earth.  When  they  began  to  sprout,  he 
turned  the  cylinder  around  quarter  way  of  its 
circumference ;  then  a  little  more  the  next  day ; 
and  so  on,  a  little  each  day,  until  the  cylinder 
had  described  a  complete  revolution — had  been 
turned   completely   around.    Then   the   beans 

37 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

were  taken  from  the  earth,  and  lo!  the  roots 
and  sprouts  formed  a  complete  spiral.  With 
every  turn  of  the  cylinder  the  roots  and  sprouts 
had  changed  their  position  and  direction — the 
roots  striving  to  grow  *^ downward,'^  and  the 
sprouts  striving  to  grow  **  upward  *' — until  the 
spiral  had  formed.  Akin  to  this  is  the  boy's 
trick  of  uprooting  a  sprouting  seed,  and  re- 
planting it  upside  down,  in  which  case  the 
sprouts  begin  to  turn  a  semicircle  until  it  is 
able  to  grow  straight  up  to  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  while  the  roots  describe  a  semicircle 
until  they  can  grow  downward  once  more. 

And  so  on,  story  after  story  of  ^* Appetency'' 
or  Mentation  in  plants  might  be  told,  until  we 
reach  the  insect-catching  species,  when  even  the 
most  conservative  observer  is  forced  to  admit 
that:  **Well,  it  does  almost  seem  like  think- 
ing, doesn't  it?"  Any  lover  of  plants,  flowers 
or  trees,  and  who  has  been  able  to  study  them 
at  first  hand,  does  not  need  much  argument  to 
prove  that  plant-life  exhibits  traces  of  Menta- 
tion, some  of  it  pretty  far  advanced,  too.  Some 
lovers  of  plants  go  so  far  as  to  claim  that  one 
must  *^love"  plants  before  they  will  succeed  in 
growing  them,  and  that  the  plants  feel  and  re- 
spond to  the  feeling.  But  the  writer  does  not 
insist  upon  this,  but  merely  mentions  it  in  pass- 
ing. 


THE  UNIVEESALITY  OF  LIFE  AND  MIND 

Before  leaving  the  subject  of  Mentation  in 
plants,  the  writer  is  tempted  to  steal  a  little 
more  space  and  tell  you  that  plants  do  more 
than  receive  sensations  of  light  and  moisture. 
They  exhibit  rudimentary  taste  as  well. 
Haeckel  relates  an  interesting  story  of  an 
insect-catching  plant.  He  states  that  while  it 
will  bend  its  leaves  when  any  solid  body  (ex- 
cepting a  raindrop)  touches  its  surface,  still  it 
will  secrete  its  acrid  digestive  fluid  only  when 
that  object  happens  to  be  nitrogenous  (meat  or 
cheese).  The  plant  is  able  to  distinguish  its 
meat  diet  (its  food  being  insectivorous),  and 
while  it  will  supply  its  gastric  juice  for  meat 
and  cheese,  as  well  as  for  the  insect,  it  will 
not  do  so  for  other  solids  to  which  it  is  indif- 
ferent. He  also  mentions  the  fact  that  roots 
of  trees  and  plants  are  able  to  taste  the  differ- 
ent qualities  of  soil,  and  will  avoid  poor  soil 
and  plunge  into  the  richer  parts  of  the  earth. 
The  sexual  organism  and  life  of  plants  also 
affords  a  great  field  for  study  to  the  student 
hunting  for  evidences  of  *4ife''  and  Menta- 
tion'*  in  that  kingdom. 

The  motion  or  circulation  of  the  sap  in  trees 
and  plants  was  formerly  considered  to  be  due 
to  capillary  attraction  and  purely  **  mechanical 
laws,"  but  recent  scientific  experiments  have 
shown  it  to  be  a  vital  action — an  evidence  of 

39 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

life  and  Mentation — the  experiments  having 
proven  that  if  the  cell-substance  of  the  plant 
was  poisoned  or  paralyzed,  the  circulation  of 
sap  immediately  ceased,  although  the  **  mechan- 
ical principles"  had  not  been  interfered  with 
in  the  least. 

And  now  on  to  the  mineral  kingdom. 
**What,"  you  may  cry,  '*Mind  and  Mentation 
in  the  mineral  and  chemical  world — surely 
not?"  Yes,  even  in  these  low  planes  may  be 
found  traces  of  mental  action.  There  is  Life 
everywhere — even  there.  And  where  there  is 
Life  there  is  Mind.  Away  back  among  the 
chemical  principles,  and  the  minerals  we  may 
go  in  our  search  for  Life  and  Mind — they  can- 
not escape  us — even  there ! 


40 


CHAPTER  IV 

LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

T^O  the  majority  of  persons  the  title  of  this 
■■-  chapter  would  seem  an  absurdity.  Not  to 
speak  of  Inorganic  **Mind,''  the  idea  of  *^Life'' 
in  the  Inorganic  World  would  seem  a  ridiculous 
paradox  to  the  **man  on  the  street''  who  thinks 
of  Substance  as  **dead,''  lifeless  and  inert. 
And,  to  tell  the  truth,  even  Science  has  held 
this  view  until  a  comparatively  recent  period, 
laughing  to  scorn  the  old  Occult  Teaching  that 
the  Universe  is  Alive,  and  capable  of  Thinking. 
But  the  recent  discoveries  of  modern  Science 
has  changed  all  this,  and  we  no  longer  hear 
Science  speaking  of  *^dead  Matter''  or  '* blind 
Force" — it  recognizes  that  these  terms  are 
meaningless,  and  that  the  dreams  of  the  old  Oc- 
cultists are  coining  true.  Science  confronts  a 
live  and  thinking  Universe.  She  is  dazzled  by 
the  sight,  and  would  shade  her  eyes,  fearing  to 
see  that  which  she  feels  must  present  itself  to 
her  vision  when  her  eyes  become  accustomed 
to  the  sight. 

41 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

But  a  few  daring  minds  among  the  scientific 
investigators  are  dreaming  wonderful  dreams 
to-day,  and  they  tell  us  in  broken  tones  of  the 
wonderful  visions  that  are  passing  before  their 
sight.  They  dare  not  tell  it  all,  for  they  fear 
the  ridicule  of  their  fellows.  Their  visions  are 
of  Life — Universal  Life.  In  its  investigations 
of  the  Material,  Science  has  penetrated  so  far 
into  the  recesses  of  Things  that  its  most  ad- 
vanced thinkers  and  investigators  now  find 
themselves  standing  in  the  presence  of  the  Im- 
material. 

Science  to-day  is  proclaiming  the  new  doc- 
trine— that  is  the  same  as  the  *'old''  doctrine 
of  the  Occultists — the  doctrine  of  **Life  Every- 
where''— Life  even  in  the  hardest  rock! 

Before  entering  into  our  consideration  of  the 
evidence  of  Mentation  in  the  Inorganic  world, 
let  us  accustom  ourselves  to  the  idea  of  '*  some- 
thing like  Life"  being  found  there.  It  will  be 
better  for  us  to  approach  the  subject  by  easy 
stages.  Where  there  is  Life  there  must  be 
Mind — so  let  us  first  look  for  evidences  of  Life. 

The  '*man  on  the  street"  would  require 
something  more  tangible  than  scientific  ex- 
planations of  *' sensation,"  *' attraction,"  etc. 
What  can  we  offer  him  as  an  illustration?  Let 
us  see ! 

Suppose  we  call  the  attention  of  *'the  man" 

42 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

to  the  fact  that  metals  get  tired  after  consider- 
able work  without  periods  of  rest.  Science 
calls  this  the  **fatigue  of  elasticity.**  When 
the  metals  are  given  rest,  they  recuperate  and 
regain  their  former  elasticity  and  health. 
**The  man**  may  remember  that  his  razor  acts 
this  way  occasionally — and  if  he  talks  the  mat- 
ter over  with  his  barber,  his  suspicions  will  be 
verified. 

Then,  if  he  consults  a  musician  friend,  he 
will  be  informed  that  tuning-forks  also  become 
tired,  and  lose  their  vibrating  quality,  until 
they  are  given  a  rest.  Then  his  machinist 
friend  will  tell  him  that  machinery  in  factories 
must  be  given  a  rest,  occasionally,  else  it  will 
begin  to  disintegrate  and  **die.**  Machinery 
will  go  on  a  strike  for  a  rest,  if  it  is  overworked. 

Then  metals  contract  disease.  Science  in- 
forms us  that  zinc  and  tin  have  been  infected, 
and  the  infection  has  spread  from  sheet  to 
sheet  crumbling  the  metal  into  powder — the 
spread  of  the  infection  resembling  the  spread  of 
a  plague  among  animals  or  plant-life.  Science 
has  experimented  with  copper  and  iron,  and 
has  found  that  these  metals  may  be  poisoned 
with  chemicals,  and  will  remain  in  a  weakened 
condition  until  antidotes  are  administered. 
Window-glass  workers  declare  that  there  is 
such  a  thing  as  *' glass-disease,**  that  will  ruin 

43 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

fine  stained  glass  windows  unless  the  infected 
panes  are  removed.  The  '* glass-disease''  starts 
with  one  pane,  and  spreads  gradually  to  the 
entire  window,  and  from  there  to  other  win- 
dows. 

Metallurgists  have  found  that  when  metallic 
ores  are  put  under  certain  forms  of  pressure, 
they  seem  to  lose  strength,  and  become  weak 
until  the  pressure  is  removed. 

Do  these  things  mean  anything  to  the  **Man 
of  the  Street  r' 

Another  step  in  the  consideration  of  Life  in 
the  Inorganic  world,  is  the  realization  of  the 
fact  that,  after  all,  there  is  but  the  very  finest 
line  separating  the  higher  forms  of  Mineral 
**life,''  from  the  lower  forms  of  vegetable  life, 
or  the  life  of  those  ** Things"  which  we  may 
call  either  plants  or  animals.  The  ** Life-line'' 
is  being  pushed  further  back  every  day,  by 
scientific  investigation,  and  the  *  living"  thing 
of  today  was  the  *  inanimate"  thing  of  yes- 
terday. We  hear  much  talk  in  the  newspapers 
about  some  scientist,  or  another,  **  discovering 
life,''  or  '* creating  life,"  in  some  * 'inanimate 
substance."  Bless  your  hearts,  you  who  are 
alarmed  by  these  reports — no  one  can  ** create" 
life  in  anything,  for  it  already  exists  there. 
The  ''discovery"  is  simply  the  realization  of 
this  fact. 

44 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

Science,  by  means  of  the  microscope,  has 
brought  to  light  forms  of  ** living  things,'' 
resembling  in  appearance  the  fine  dust  of  in- 
organic minerals.  These  low  forms  of  life 
exhibit  but  the  simplest  vital  processes,  the 
same  very  closely  resembling  chemical  proc- 
esses, although  just  a  shade  higher  in  the  scale. 
Living  creatures  have  been  found  which  could 
be  dried  and  laid  aside  like  dust  for  several 
years,  and  then  revived  by  being  immersed  in 
water,  when  they  would  resume  their  vital  proc- 
ess as  if  they  had  been  awakened  from  a  sleep. 
Forms  of  life,  called  **Baccilli"  have  been  dis- 
covered that  can  pass  through  degrees  of  heat 
and  cold  that  can  be  expressed  only  by  vague 
symbols  or  figures,  the  heat  and  cold  being  so 
intense  that  the  unscientific  mind  cannot  im- 
agine it. 

In  appearance  the  ''Diatoms"  resemble  the 
chemical  crystals.  These  ''Diatoms"  are  min- 
ute one-celled  living  "Things,"  having  a  hard 
but  thin  siliceous  covering  or  shell,  of  extreme 
delicacy.  They  are  what  are  known  as  "micro- 
scopic" creatures — that  is,  visible  only  through 
the  microscope.  Some  of  them  are  so  small 
that  it  would  take  a  thousand  or  more  to  cover 
the  head  of  a  pin.  But,  remember  this — the 
microscope  reveals  them  as  "living  creatures" 
performing  vital  functions.     They  are  found 

45 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

in  the  deep  waters  of  the  ocean.  To  the  naked 
eye  they  appear  like  fine  sand  or  **dirt,''  but 
under  the  most  powerful  microscope,  they  are 
seen  to  comprise  many  species  and  varieties, 
exhibiting  many  peculiar  shapes  and  forms — ^in 
fact,  they  have  been  called  *^  living  geometrical 
forms,'*  their  shapes  and  appearances  almost 
exactly  resembling  those  of  the  chemical  and 
mineral  crystals. 

Science  informs  us  that  these  and  similar 
microscopic  creatures,  number  thousands  of 
families  or  species, — and  it  is  thought  that  the 
varieties  of  microscopic  creatures  outnumber 
the  varieties  of  creatures  visible  to  the  unaided 
sight.  And,  remember,  that  there  is  probably 
a  still  greater  world  of  ** sub-microscopic'* 
creatures,  that  is  a  world  invisible  even  when 
the  most  powerful  microscope  is  used.  Who 
knows  what  wonders  are  to  be  found  there — 
what  forms  of  creatures  live,  and  move  and 
have  their  being  there. 

In  passing  by  the  subject  of  the  resemblance 
between  the  outward  forms  of  living  things  and 
the  crystals,  it  is  interesting  to  note  how  the 
crystals  of  frost  and  ice  resemble  the  forms 
of  leaves,  branches,  flowers,  foliage,  etc. — the 
pane  of  glass  covered  with  these  frosty  forms, 
resembles  a  garden.     The  disk  of  saltpeter, 

46 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

under  the  effect  of  polarized  light,  very  closely 
resembles  the  form  of  the  orchid. 

Eecent  scientific  experiments  have  shown 
that  certain  metallic  salts,  when  subjected  to 
a  galvanic  current,  group  themselves  around 
one  of  the  poles  of  the  battery,  and  assume  a 
mushroom-like  shape  and  appearance.  At  first, 
they  seem  to  be  transparent,  but  gradually  they 
assume  color,  the  top  becoming  a  bright  red, 
with  the  under-side  showing  a  pale  rose  color, 
the  stem  being  of  a  pale  straw  color.  The  dis- 
coverers of  these  peculiar  forms,  called  them 
by  the  German  equivalent  for  *  inorganic  mush- 
rooms,'* but  even  this  term  seems  scarcely 
worthy  of  them,  for  they  even  show  a  trace 
of  something  like  organs.  Under  the  micro- 
scope they  are  seen  to  have  fine  canals  or  vein- 
like channels  running  through  their  stems, 
from  top  to  base.  And  through  these  *' veins*' 
the  *' thing'*  absorbed  fresh  material  and 
actually  **grew"  like  low  forms  of  fungus-life. 
Were  these  things  merely  minerals  or  chemical- 
substances,  or  were  they  low  forms  of  organic 
life?  The  lines  between  the  Inorganic  and  the 
Organic  are  being  wiped  out  rapidly.  The 
Supreme  Power  that  caused  Life  to  Be,  caused 
it  to  All,  and  did  not  divide  Its  manifesta- 
tions into  Dead-Things  and  Live-Things,  but 
breathed  into  all  the  Breath  of  Life.    And  the 

47 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

more  clearly  we  see  the  actual  evidence  of  this, 
the  greater  does  that  Supreme  Power  seem 
to  us. 

A  very  low  form  of  living  creatures  called 
the  Monera,  is  held  by  Science  to  be  the  one 
of  the  strands  of  the  connecting  link  between 
the  organic  and  inorganic  worlds.  The  Mo- 
nera are  the  lowest  and  simplest  form  (at 
least  so  far  known)  of  organic  life.  They  may 
be  said  to  be  **  organic ''  creatures  without 
organs — being  but  little  more  than  simple  cells 
— tiny  globules  of  plasm,  surrounded  by  a  thin 
membrane — their  sole  vital  function  being  the 
absorption  of  nourishment  through  the  pores 
of  their  covering  (just  as  a  piece  of  chalk  would 
absorb  water)  and  the  consequent  conversion 
of  the  nourishmnt  into  material  for  growth,  the 
whole  process  resembling  chemical  action.  The 
Monera  reproduce  their  kind  simply  by  cleav- 
age or  separation  of  the  substance  of  the 
mother  cell  into  two,  and  so  on,  being  little  more 
than  the  ** growth''  of  crystals.  The  Monera 
are  everywhere  recognized,  without  question, 
as  *  living  creatures,"  but  they  exhibit  merely 
a  trace  more  of  life  than  do  certain  forms  of 
crystals. 

The  difficulty  in  considering  crystals  as 
'* living  things''  is  partially  due  to  the  outward 
form  and  substance,  so  diffrent  from  the  form 

48 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

and  substance  of  the  higher  ^ living  things.'' 
But  we  have  seen  that  the  Diatoms  took  on 
shapes  of  crystals,  and  that  the  outer  shell  or 
covering  was  similar  to  silicia,  a  mineral,  the 
inner  substance  being  but  a  tiny  speck  of  plasm, 
similar  to  that  of  the  substance  of  a  plant  cell. 
And  then  we  may  look  to  the  tiny  bit  of  chalk 
dust  which  was  once  the  skeleton-form  of  a 
living  creature.  The  same  is  true  of  coral.  In 
the  very  low  forms  of  life,  the  skeleton,  or  form, 
is  the  thing  most  apparent,  the  plasm  of  *' living 
substance''  being  still  smaller,  and  less  ap- 
parent. And  yet,  the  skeleton,  or  shell,  was 
formed  by  the  vital  processes  of  the  creature, 
and  was  a  part  of  its  ^^body,"  just  as  is  the 
skeleton  or  bony  structure  of  the  higher 
animals.  And,  in  the  same  sense  it  is  'living 
substance."  And,  remember,  that  there  is  but 
little  difference  between  these  '* bodies"  of  the 
low  forms  of  life,  and  the  bodies  of  crystals. 
And  the  chemical  constituents  of  its  plasmic 
inner  body  is  but  slightly  different  from  that  of 
the  crystals.  And  its  nature  and  vital  process 
are  by  a  shade  higher  in  the  scale  than  those  of 
the  crystals. 

You  may  ask  why  we  have  said  so  much  of 
Crystals.  The  reason  is  just  this — Science  has 
begun  to  think  of  Crystals  as  semi-living 
things,  and  its  most  advanced  investigators  and 

49 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

thinkers  go  further  and  assert  that  *^the  Crys- 
tals are  alive — Crystallization  is  an  evidence 
of  life  process.*' 

Crystals  arrange  themselves  in  well-known 
and  well-defined  shapes,  direction  and  order 
of  formation  being  observed  implicitly.  Each 
crystal  follows  the  laws  and  habits  of  its  kind, 
just  as  do  plants  and  animals.  Its  lines  of 
crystallization  are  mathematically  perfect,  and 
according  to  the  laws  of  its  being.  Not  only 
this,  but  some  substances  have  a  range  of  six 
or  seven  different  forms  of  crystal-forms  pos- 
sible to  them.  In  some  cases  a  chemical  element 
assumes  one  form  of  crystallization  when  it 
manifests  as  one  mineral,  and  a  second  form 
when  it  manifests  in  another  form — in  each 
case  however,  it  manifests  along  well-known 
and  recognized  courses  of  action,  movement, 
and  shapes. 

Crystals  may  be  '* killed''  by  a  strong  elec- 
trical discharge — that  is,  they  are  so  affected 
that  they  disintegrate,  their  atoms  separating 
to  form  new  combinations,  just  as  is  the  case 
with  the  ''bodies"  of  higher  forms  of  life. 
Some  scientists  have  gone  so  far  as  to  claim 
that  they  had  discovered  something  akin  to 
rudimentary  sex-action  in  certain  crystals,  re- 
sembling the  sex-process  of  the  lowest  plant- 
life.    But  this  has  not,  as  yet,  been  positively 

50 


I 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

established,  although  it  seems  probable  and 
reasonable.  A  recent  writer  in  one  of  the 
magazines  has  said,  *  *  Crystallization,  as  we  are 
to  learn  now,  is  not  a  mere  mechanical  group- 
ing of  dead  atoms.  It  is  a  birth.''  This  may- 
seem  mere  *  ^  scientific  poetry ' '  until  the  proc- 
ess of  crystallization  is  carefully  studied,  when 
it  will  be  seen  to  give  evidence,  not  only  of 
something  like  vital  and  mental  action,  but 
also  something  very  much  like  reproductive 
functioning  of  the  lower  forms  of  **life.'' 

There  is  an  ** assimilation''  of  material  to 
build  up  the  crystal  in  the  first  place,  just  as 
an  animal  assimilates  matter  to  build  up  its 
shell — or  a  tree  to  form  its  bark.  The  ^^form" 
of  the  crystal  is  truly  its  *^body,"  and  behind 
and  in  that  body  there  is  *^ something  at  work^' 
that  is  not  the  body,  but  which  is  forming  it. 
And,  later  on,  that  crystal  increases  in  size,  and 
then  begins  to  separate  into  two,  throwing  off 
a  smaller  crystal,  identical  in  form  with  the 
parent  crystal.  This  manner  of  reproduction 
is  almost  identical  with  the  process  of  repro- 
duction in  the  lower  forms  of  ^4ife,"  which 
consist  merely  of  a  like  separation  of  the  parent 
form  into  two,  and  the  throwing  off  of  the  off- 
spring. 

The  principal  difference  between  the  growth 
of  crystals  and  of  the  Monera,  is  that  the 

51 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Crystals  grow  by  absorbing  fresh  matter  and 
attaching  it  to  their  outer  surface,  while  the 
Monera  grow  by  absorbing  fresh  material  and 
growing  outwardly,  from  within.  But  this  may 
be  accounted  for  by  the  difference  in  the  density 
of  their  bodies,  the  Crystal  being  very  solid, 
while  the  Monera  is  like  a  thin  jelly.  If  the 
Crystal  had  a  soft  interior,  it  could  grow  like 
the  Monera  or  Diatom,  but  then  it  would  be  a 
Diatom, 

The  process  of  crystallization  is  accountable 
only  by  the  theory  that  in  the  crystal  there 
exists  something  like  life  and  Mentation.  There 
is  something  more  than  mere  ^*  mechanical 
motion,''  or  blind  chance  at  work  here.  Does 
not  the  process  of  crystallization  look  like  rudi- 
mentary purposive  action?  It  may  be  said  that 
it  is  movement  and  action  in  accordance  with 
some  established  **Law  of  Nature'' — granted, 
but  is  not  that  also  true  of  the  physical  proc- 
esses and  growth  of  higher  forms  of  life?  Is 
the  forming  of  the  Crystal-form  to  be  con- 
sidered as  a  '^mechanical  effect,"  and  the  form- 
ing of  the  ''shell"  of  the  Monera  to  be  con- 
sidered a  "mental  and  vital  action?"  If  so, 
wherefore? 

The  point  is  that  Crystals  act  as  if  they  are 
''alive,"  and  capable  of  assimilation,  growth, 
and  reproduction,  in  a  manner  and  degree  dif- 

52 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

fering  but  very  slightly  from  corresponding 
functioning  of  the  lower  forms  of  *4ife." 
Verily  the  Crystals  are  ** alive'' — and  if  alive 
they  must  have  at  least  a  trace  of  **Mind.'' 
Does  it  not  appear  that  they  exhibit  something 
very  like  both?  Quoting  from  a  recent  writer, 
let  us  notice  that:  ** Recent  investigations  in 
the  new  department  of  science,  which  has  been 
termed  *plasmology,'  show  in  crystals  phe- 
nomena which  are  absolutely  analogous  to  vital 
phenomena — so  much  so  that  photographs  of 
certain  forms  produced  in  the  changes  of  crys- 
tals appear  to  be  almost  exact  duplicates  of 
those  in  the  various  lower  forms  of  microbes. 
The  question  has  been  raised  as  to  whether  the 
microbe  is  no  more  alive  than  the  crystal,  or 
the  latter  equally  endowed  with  life  as  is  the 
former/' 

And  now  another  step,  in  our  search  for  Life. 
Remember,  that  the  hardest  rocks  are  com- 
posed of  crystals  of  certain  kinds.  And,  if  the 
higher  crystals  have  Life,  then  it  is  only  fair 
to  suppose  that  the  lower  and  cruder  forms 
are  likewise  endowed,  even  if  in  a  still  lower 
degree.  And  if  all  crystals  are  endowed  with 
Life,  then  the  most  solid  rocks,  being  composed 
of  aggregations  of  crystals  must  be  masses  of 
Liorganic  Life — and  consequently,  of  Inor- 
ganic Mind.    A  Crystal,  according  to  Webster, 

63 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

is  **the  regular  form,  bounded  by  plane  sur- 
faces, which  a  substance  tends  to  assume  in 
solidifying,  through  the  inherent  powers  of 
cohesive  attraction/' 

That  definition  of  AYebster  tells  the  whole 
story,  and  we  see  that  a  ^* Crystal''  is  merely 
a  ** regular  form"  of  a  ** Substance,"  which 
the  substance  '* tends  to  assume  in  solidifying" 
— that  is  in  re-assuming  a  solid  form  after 
being  in  a  liquid  or  melted  state,  and  that  is 
just  what  all  the  rocks  of  the  earth  did  when 
they  emerged  from  the  melted  state  in  which 
they  existed  in  the  early  days  of  the  world's 
history.  And  this  ** tendency"  that  caused 
them  to  solidify,  and  assume  certain  crystal 
forms,  and  which  must  have  existed  potentially 
through  the  melted  state — ^what  of  that,  what 
is  this  ** tendency"  or  force.  The  definition 
answers:  *Hhe  inherent  powers  of  cohesive  at- 
traction/' 

So,  here  is  **  Cohesive  Attraction,  that  we 
shall  consider  fully  in  forthcoming  chapters  of 
this  book.  ** Inherent,"  too,  the  definition  says. 
What  is  ** Inherent?"  Let  us  see,  Webster  de- 
fines ** Inherent"  as  ** permanently  existing." 
So  this  power  of  Cohesive  Attraction  *' perma- 
nently existed"  in  the  Substance  or  else  in  con- 
nection with  it.  Let  us  take  another  look  at 
Cohesive  Attraction. 

54 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

Cohesive  Attraction  is  that  form  of  Univer- 
sal Attraction  that  causes  the  Molecules  of  a 
body  to  draw  together — that  *  invisible  power 
of  the  Molecule,  by  which  it  draws  another 
Molecule  toward  itself,  and  itself  toward  the 
other,  the  manifestation  of  which  power  by  sev- 
eral Molecules  tends  to  draw  each  of  them 
together.  (We  shall  learn  of  these  particles 
of  Substance  called  Molecules  before  long.)  It 
is  a  primal  cause  of  Motion,  this  mutual  Attrac- 
tion, and  drawing-power.  Now  is  it  reasonable 
to  suppose  that  this  wonderful  ** power''  is  a 
mere  blind-force?  Is  it  not  more  reasonable  to 
think  of  it  as  a  form  of  vital-action — life- 
action  1  * '  Dead ' '  things  could  not  manifest  this 
force  and  action. 

And  if  this  Cohesive  Attraction  is  an  evi- 
dence of  Life,  then  all  substance  must  have 
Life  manifesting  through  it.  Not  only  the 
rocks,  but  the  soil  and  earth  and  dirt,  for  they 
are  but  crumbled  rock. 

And,  when  we  thus  consider  Substance,  as 
being  the  ^*body''  through  which  Life  is  Mani- 
festing, we  must  not  lose  sight  of  the  Mole- 
cules and  Atoms,  in  our  consideration  of  the 
Mass.  A  bit  of  rock;  crystal;  or  dirt;  is 
but  an  aggregation  of  countless  Molecules, 
grouped  together  in  certain  crystallized  shapes 
and  forms,  each  having  characteristics  of  its 

55 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

own.  These  Molecules  cling  together,  in  ac- 
cordance with  their  mutual  Attractive  powers 

And  each  of  these  Molecules  is  composed  of 
a  number  of  Atoms,  which  cling  together  in 
accordance  with  Chemical  Affinity,  or  Chemism 
— but  which  is  but  another  name  for  Attraction, 
or  Cohesion — and  which  form  a  little  family, 
called  a  Molecule.  And  these  Atoms  are  com- 
posed of  Corpuscles.  We  will  waive  the  con- 
sideration of  the  Corpuscle,  for  the  moment, 
but  even  if  we  consider  it,  we  only  carry  the 
subject  back  a  step  farther.  What  we  wish  to 
say,  could  be  said  even  if  there  were  ten  further 
divisions  of  Substance — or  a  million,  for  that 
matter. 

The  point  we  wish  you  to  consider  now,  is 
that  we  must  separate  the  Mass  into  its  con- 
stituents— its  Molecules,  Atoms,  and  even  Cor- 
puscles— ^in  our  search  for  the  Life  in  the  Min- 
eral and  Chemical  World.  If  there  is  Life  in 
the  Mass,  there  must  be  life  in  the  Molecule, 
Atom,  or  Corpuscle.  Now,  do  we  find  it  there? 
Certainly,  for  the  tiniest  Atom  manifests  its 
Attractive  Power,  and  not  only  does  it  draw 
other  atoms  to  itself  by  virtue  thereof,  but  it 
even  goes  a  step  further,  and  shows  a  **  prefer- 
ence"— a  degree  of  *  diking''  in  its  mutual  re- 
lations with  other  atoms. 

We  shall  see,  in  future  chapters,  that  there  is 

56 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

** desire/*  *4ove,"  ^* marriage,'*  and  ** divorce" 
among  the  chemical  Atoms.  We  shall  consider 
the  flirtations,  and  love-affairs  of  certain 
Atoms.  We  shall  see  how  an  Atom  will  leave 
another,  and  fly  to  a  new  charmer.  We  shall 
have  many  evidences  of  the  Atom's  power  to 
receive  sensations,  and  to  respond  to  the  same. 
Nothing  ^* dead''  about  this,  is  there?  The  Atom 
is  ^^very  much  alive."  The  Attraction;  Affin- 
ity; and  Motions,  of  the  Atom,  give  a  certain 
evidence  of  something  'Very  much  like  Life," 
as  we  see  it  in  higher  forms.  In  the  Atom 
exists  all  the  Life  that  causes  crystallization. 
And  in  the  Atom  lies  that  which  causes  Force 
and  Motion  to  manifest.  Verily,  the  Atom 
lives  and  moves  and  has  its  being. 

And,  so  our  journey  is  ended — we  have 
traced  Life  to  its  last  stages  of  manifestations 
— and  we  have  found  it  there,  and  at  each  step 
of  the  journey.  But,  stop,  we  have  not  com- 
pleted our  journey — we  have  but  begun  it. 
**Why,"  some  of  us  may  cry,  **how  can  we  go 
back  of  the  Atom,  or  Electron?"  The  answer 
is  ^'INTO  THE  ETHER"! 

Yes,  back  of  the  Atom  and  the  Corpuscle, 
is  said  by  Science  to  lie  that  wonderful,  para- 
doxical Something  they  call  The  Universal 
Ether — that  Something  that  Science  has  con- 
sidered the  Womb  of  Matter  and  Force — Some- 

57 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

thing  that  is  different  from  Anything  ever 
known  or  dreamed  of  by  Man, — that  Something 
which  Science  has  labored  so  diligently  to 
build  up,  and  which  it  has  used  as  an  *  *  explana- 
tion" for  so  much  phenomena,  but  regarding 
which,  of  very  recent  date,  there  has  begun  to 
grow  a  distrust  and  a  suspicion,  owing  to  the 
discovery  of  Eadiant  Matter,  and  things  that 
followed  in  its  train.  But,  notwithstanding 
these  shadowy  suspicions.  Science  still  asserts 
in  belief  in  the  constancy  and  integrity  of  The 
Ether,  and  it  behooves  us  to  investigate  that 
wonderful  region  in  which  it  dwells,  in  order  to 
see  whether  Life  and  Mind  are  also  to  be  found 
there.  We  think  that,  in  the  words  of  the 
street,  we  shall  find  that  they  are  *Wery  much 
there. ' ' 

And,  so  in  later  chapters  of  this  book,  we 
shall  consider  the  Etherial  Eegion  very  fully. 
But  before  doing  so,  we  had  better  give  Sub- 
stance and  Motion,  in  all  their  forms,  a  careful 
consideration,  for  a  correct  understanding  of 
them  is  vitally  necessary  for  an  intelligent  con- 
ception of  the  ideas  underlying  the  philosophy 
to  be  herein  set  forth. 

Now,  pray  do  not  leave  this  chapter  with  the 
belief  that  the  writer  has  said  that  the  Par- 
ticles of  Inorganic  Substance  are  endowed  with 

68 


LIFE  AND  MIND  AMONG  THE  ATOMS 

Conscious  reasoning  powers.  Nothing  of  the 
kind  has  been  said — nothing  of  the  kind  is 
meant.  The  Life  and  Mind  evidenced  in  the 
Particles  are  but  the  faintest  glimmerings. 
There  is  no  sign  of  ** consciousness''  or  *^ rea- 
soning''— the  Mind  exhibited  is  less  than  that 
of  the  plant,  yes,  less  than  even  that  of  the 
cell  of  the  plant.  The  Life  is  evidenced  by- 
power  to  move,  and  the  Mind  is  evidenced  by 
the  ability  to  receive  impressions  and  to  re- 
spond to  the  same  by  evidencing  Force  and 
movement. 

There  is  no  evidence  of  *^ consciousness"  or 
^* understanding"  in  these  mental  processes. 
Consciousness  is  not  an  essential  attribute  of 
Life  or  Mind-action.  In  fact,  but  a  small  part 
of  even  the  Mentation  of  Man  is  performed  in 
the  field  of  consciousness.  Nearly  all  of  his 
bodily  functions  are  beneath  the  field  of  con- 
sciousness— one  does  not  consciously  regulate 
the  beating  of  his  heart;  the  circulation  of  his 
blood;  the  digestion  and  assimilation  of  his 
food;  the  tearing-down  and  building-up  work 
of  the  cells;  the  work  of  the  organs,  etc.,  etc. 
Yes,  these  processes  are  all  mental  processes, 
and  far  from  mere  ** mechanical  movements," 
or  chemical  processes,  as  some  imagine.  Let 
the  spark  of  Life  leave  the  body,  and  the  proc- 
esses stop,  although  all  the  chemicals  are  still 

69 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

there,  and  the  *^ mechanical  movements''  might 
go  on  unhindered. 

The  Particles  of  Substance  have  enough  Life 
and  Mind  to  enable  them  to  move,  receive  and 
respond  to  impressions,  and  to  exert  force  in 
accordance  with  the  Law  of  Attraction — ^but 
there  it  stops.  The  Crystals  show  signs  of 
something  like  taking  nourishment,  but  the  real 
taking  of  food  may  be  said  to  commence  with 
the  Monera.  Not  until  very  high  degrees  of  Life 
and  Mind  are  attained,  do  ** creatures"  begin 
to  exhibit  Consciousness,  and  that  which  is 
called  '* Understanding''  is  still  higher  in  the 
scale,  and  not  imtil  Man  is  reached  does  the 
faculty  of  turning  the  mental  searchlight  in- 
ward manifest  itself.  These  matters  are  men- 
tioned here  merely  to  prevent  misunderstand- 
ing and  misapprehension. 

But  still,  do  not  forget — the  Particles  of  Sub- 
stance receive  impressions  and  respond  thereto 
— they  act  and  exert  Force  and  Energy — ^they 
manifest  Life  and  Mentation. 


60 


CHAPTER  y 

THE  STOBY  OF  SUBSTANCE 

A  S  we  stated  in  a  former  chapter,  there  are 
^^  two  Aspects  of  All-Things,  viz.,  (1)  Sub- 
stance; (2)  Mind.  In  this  and  the  following 
two  chapters  we  shall  consider  the  first  one, 
Substance,  which  Science  calls  ^* Matter.'' 

Perhaps  it  would  be  as  well  to  begin  by  ask- 
ing ourselves  the  question:  ''What  is  Sub- 
stance f  The  answer  seems  to  be :  ''Anything 
that  takes  up  room;  the  Body  aspect  of  Things; 
matter  occupying  space,  etc.''  Some  writers 
have  spoken  of  Substance  as  "something 
tangible — that  can  be  felt,"  but  this  definition 
will  not  do,  for  there  are  forms  of  Substance 
too  fine  to  be  felt.  And  so,  perhaps  the  defini- 
tion "The  Body  of  Things,"  is  as  good  a 
definition  as  any,  taken  in  connection  with  the 
thought  that  it  "takes  up  room." 

Science  divides  Substance  (which  it  calls 
"Matter")  into  four  general  classes,  viz.:  (1) 
Solid  Matter,  which  is  Substance,  the  parts  of 
which  closely  adhere  and  resist  impression, 

61 


I 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

such  as  stone,  wood,  flesh,  etc.,  the  degrees  of 
solidity  varying  greatly,  and  sometimes  shading 
into  the  next  class,  which  is  called : 

(2)  Liquid  Matter,  which  may  be  described 
as  Substance,  the  parts  of  which  have  a  free 
motion  among  themselves,  and  easily  yield  to 
impression,  such  as  water,  molasses,  etc.,  the 
degree  of  fluidity  ranging  from  some  liquids 
that  flow  very  slowly,  such  as  hot  pitch,  up  to 
others  that  flow  very  freely,  such  as  water, 
wine,  etc.,  the  property  of  fluidity  being  also 
shared  by  the  next  higher  class,  which  is  called 

(3)  Aeriform  Matter,  which  is  Substance  in 
the  form  of  ** elastic  fluid,''  such  as  air,  gas, 
vapor,  etc. ;  and 

(4)  Radiant  Matter,  which  is  of  recent  rec- 
ognition, and  which  is  an  ultra-gaseous  form  of 
Substance,  utterly  unlike  anything  ever  before 
known,  consisting  of  the  tiniest  particles  of 
''corpuscles''  of  Substance  finer  and  more 
subtle  than  the  rarest  form  of  atomic  substance 
known  to  Science. 

The  three  classes  are  well  represented  by  (1) 
Earth  (solid);  (2)  Water  (liquid);  (3)  Air 
(aeriform) ;  (4)  The  Corpuscles  or  Electrons, 
or  particles  of  electrified  substance,  first  noticed 
in  connection  with  the  X  Eays,  Eadium,  etc. 

But  it  must  be  remembered  that  these  four 
classes  of  Substance  are  not  fixed  or  permanent 

62 


THE  STOBY  OF  SUBSTANCE 

— on  the  contrary  they  are  changeable  either 
under  pressure,  when  subjected  to  heat,  or 
under  the  influence  of  electricity,  etc.  In  fact 
the  word  ^* condition''  is  more  applicable  than 
the  term  ^* class/'  The  condition  or  class  of  a 
particle  of  Substance  may  be  changed  into  an- 
other class  or  condition  by  the  application  of 
the  agencies  above  named.  The  same  substance 
may  exist  in  two  or  three  classes,  under  differ- 
ent circumstances.  Solids  may  be  changed 
into  liquids,  and  liquids  into  gases,  and  vice 
versa,  Metals  may  be  melted,  then  changed 
into  gas,  according  to  the  degree,  of  heat  ap- 
plied. Liquids  may  be  changed  into  vapor  by 
the  application  of  heat,  or  into  solids  by  the 
withdrawal  of  heat. 

For  an  example  we  may  turn  to  Water,  which 
is  a  solid  in  the  condition  of  ice ;  a  liquid  in  the 
condition  of  water;  and  steam  in  the  condition 
of  vapor.  Quicksilver  is  a  metal  which  is  in  a 
liquid  condition  in  our  ordinary  temperature, 
but  which  becomes  a  solid  when  subjected  to  a 
very  low  degre  of  temperature,  and  may  be 
transformed  into  a  gas,  imder  a  high  degree  of 
heat.  Air  is  a  vapor  in  our  ordinary  tempera- 
ture, but  has  been  transformed  into  **  liquid 
air"  under  tremendous  pressure,  which  pro- 
duced a  very  low  degree  of  temperature,  and, 
theoretically,  it  may  be  transformed  into  a 

63 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

solid  under  a  sufficiently  low  degree  of  tem- 
perature, although  so  far,  Science  has  not  been 
able  to  produce  a  degree  of  cold  sufficient  to 
^'freeze''  the  liquid  air.  It  is  all  a  matter  of 
'^freeze,"  ^'melt,'*  and  **  evaporate,''  in  all 
forms  of  Substance — and  any  substance,  at 
least  theoretically,  is  capable  of  being  sub- 
jected to  any  of  the  three  conditions  just  named, 
and  being  manifested  in  the  respective  condi- 
tions, of  Solid,  Liquid,  and  Aeriform. 

This  may  actually  be  accomplished  with  the 
majority  of  substances  at  this  time,  although 
in  some  instances  we  are  not  able  to  produce  a 
sufficiently  high  temperature  to  *^melt  and 
evaporate"  certain  solid  substances,  on  the  one 
hand,  or  a  sufficiently  low  degree  of  tempera- 
ture to  *  liquify"  or  '^freeze  solid"  certain 
vapors.  But  the  intense  heat  of  the  centre  of 
the  earth  is  able  to  melt  rocks,  and  show  them 
as  liquid  lava  flowing  from  volcanoes,  and  Sci- 
ence teaches  that  the  solid  Substance  of  the 
Earth,  and  other  planets,  suns,  etc.,  existed  in 
the  shape  of  a  vapor  at  one  time,  and  would 
again  take  on  that  condition  in  case  of  a  col- 
lision with  another  great  body,  which  convert 
motion  into  intense  heat  that  would  first  melt, 
and  then  vaporize  every  solid  particle  of  which 
the  earth  is  composed. 

If  the  sun's  heat  were  completely  to  die  out, 

64 


THE  STORY  OF  SUBSTANCE. 

the  cold  would  be  so  intense  that  the  air  around 
the  earth,  and  all  the  gases  and  vapors,  would 
be  frozen  to  solids.  In  physics  the  term  *^gas'' 
is  generally  applied  to  a  substance  that  is  aeri- 
form in  our  ordinary  temperature,  but  which 
may  be  liquefied  in  a  low  temperature ;  the  term 
** vapor''  being  generally  applied  to  the  aeri- 
form condition  of  substances  that  are  solid  or 
liquid  in  our  ordinary  temperatures,  but  which 
may  be  ^* evaporated''  by  heat,  and  thus  trans- 
formed into  an  aeriform  condition,  resuming 
their  original  form  upon  cooling.  These  terms, 
however,  are  technical,  and  practically  there 
is  no  difference  between  a  gas  and  a  vapor. 

In  the  above  statements  regarding  the  pos- 
sibility of  the  transformation  of  each  of  the 
several  forms  of  Substance,  into  other  forms, 
the  reference  has  been  applied  only  to  the  three 
better  known  forms,  i,  e.,  Solid,  Liquid  and 
Aeriform.  The  fourth  form  or  state  of  Sub- 
stance, known  as  Radiant  Matter,  is  of  too  re- 
cent discovery  to  admit  of  its  properties  being 
accurately  observed.  The  best  and  latest  opin- 
ion of  Science,  however,  is  that  it  constitutes 
what  may  be  called  ** Primal  Matter" — that  is 
substance  from  which  all  other  forms,  states, 
kinds  and  varieties  of  Substance  arise — the 
** stuff"  from  which  they  are  manufactured. 
Science  seems  to  be  discarding  the  Ether  the- 

65 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

ory  of  the  Origin  of  Matter,  in  favor  of  this 
** Primal  Matter.'' 

Physical  Science  divides  Substance  into 
Masses,  Molecules,  and  Atoms — that  is,  the  old 
Physical  Science  did,  but  the  later  investigators 
now  see  that  even  the  Atom  may  be  sub-divided 
But  the  old  terms  may  as  well  be  used,  at  least 
for  the  time  being.  Let  us  consider  these 
divisions. 

A  '^Mass'^  is  a  quantity  of  Substance  con- 
sidered as  a  whole — ^but  which  is  composed  of 
a  collection  or  combination  of  parts  (mole- 
cules. )  A  lump  of  coal ;  a  piece  of  iron ;  a  por- 
tion of  meat,  even  a  drop  of  water,  is  a  Mass. 
The  only  requisite  for  a  Mass,  is  that  it  con- 
tains two  or  more  parts  or  molecules.  There- 
fore a  Mass  is  a  collection  or  combination  of 
two  or  more  molecules,  considered  as  a  whole. 

A  ^'Molecule''  is  the  physical  unit  of  Sub- 
stance, or,  in  other  words,  the  smallest  part  of 
any  kind  of  Substance  that  can  exist  by  itself 
and  still  remain  that  particular  '^kind''  of  sub- 
stance. (But  not  the  smallest  chemical  part — 
the  latter  is  called  an  Atom,  and  Atoms  com- 
bine to  form  a  Molecule.)  The  Molecule  exists 
as  a  unit,  and  cannot  be  split  or  separated  by 
physical  means,  although  it  may  be  separated 
into  Atoms  by  chemical  means.  In  order  that 
we  may  form  a  clear  idea  of  the  Molecule,  let 

66 


THE  STORY  OF  SUBSTANCE 

US  take  a  very  small  Mass  of  Matter — a  drop 
of  water,  for  instance.  This  drop  of  water  is 
a  Mass  composed  of  a  great  nmnber  of  mole- 
cules. It  may  be  divided,  and  sub-divided,  into 
smaller  and  still  smaller  parts.  This  division 
may  be  carried  on  until  it  reaches  a  point  where 
our  sight  and  instruments  are  unable  to  make 
a  further  sub-division. 

But,  theoretically,  the  work  may  be  carried 
on  still  further,  until  at  last  a  limit  is  reached 
where  we  are  unable  to  divide  the  water  into 
any  smaller  parts,  without  separating  its  chem- 
ical constituents  from  each  other,  in  which  lat- 
ter case  there  would  be  no  water  at  all,  its 
chemical  constituents  (or  Atoms)  having  sepa- 
rated and  now  appearing  as  two  atoms  of  Hy- 
drogen and  one  atom  of  Oxygen,  separated  and 
apart  and  no  longer  forming  a  molecule  of 
water. 

Well,  this  smallest  possible  part  of  water  (or 
any  other  form  of  Substance)  is  a  Molecule. 
Remember  the  Molecule  is  the  smallest  part  of 
that  kind  of  Substance  that  can  be  produced 
by  division  and  sub-division,  without  destroy- 
ing the  ''kind''  of  the  Substance.  It  is  the 
smallest  part  of  any  kind  of  Substance  that  can 
exist  by  itself,  and  maintain  its  ''kind." 

In  order  that  you  may  grasp  the  minuteness 
of  the  Molecule,  we  may  mention  that  Science 

67 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

claims  that  no  molecule,  even  the  largest,  is  of 
suflScient  magnitude  to  be  seen  under  even  the 
strongest  microscope.  It  has  been  calculated 
that  if  a  drop  of  water  as  large  as  a  pea  were 
magnified  to  the  size  of  the  Earth,  the  mole- 
cules would  then  appear  no  larger  than  the 
original  drop.  The  space  between  the  mole- 
cules is  believed  to  be  considerably  larger  than 
the  molecules  themselves. 

The  figures  that  are  necessary  to  use  in  con- 
nection with  molecular  Substance  are  likely  to 
stagger  the  imagination.  Besides  speaking  of 
the  molecules  of  inorganic  Substance,  it  may 
be  interesting  to  note  that  a  spider's  thread 
is  so  fine  that  a  piece  of  it  large  enough  to 
circle  the  earth  would  weigh  only  half  a  pound. 
And  yet  each  thread  is  composed  of  six  thou- 
sand filaments.  And  each  of  these  minute  fila- 
ments may  be  divided  into  tiny  bits,  and  each 
bit  will  still  be  a  Mass  of  Substance  containing 
thousands  of  molecules  and  their  constituent 
chemical  atoms.  There  are  living,  microscopic 
creatures,  so  small  that  five  millions  of  them 
might  be  crowded  into  a  space  the  size  of  a  pin 
head.  And  yet  each  of  them  have  organs.  And 
in  these  organs  fluids  circulate.  Try  to  figure 
out  the  size  of  the  molecules  of  the  fluids  cir- 
culating in  these  tiny  organs,  not  to  speak  of 
the  chemical  atoms. 

68 


THE  STORY  OF  SUBSTANCE 

When  you  handle  a  coin,  an  infinitesimal 
portion  of  it  is  worn  off — can  you  figure  the 
size  of  the  molecules  composing  that  part! 
When  a  rose  throws  off  its  perfume,  it  emanates 
tiny  particles  of  itself — can  you  measure  or 
weigh  the  molecules  composing  that  odor?  The 
human  mind  is  compelled  to  realize  its  finite- 
ness  when  it  considers  these  things — but  we 
have  only  just  begun  to  consider  the  smallness 
of  Things. 

An  ''Atom'*  is  the  chemical  unit  of  Substance 
— that  is,  the  smallest  chemical  part  that  can 
enter  into  combination.  It  has  been  considered 
indivisible — that  is,  incapable  of  further  sub- 
division. That  is,  it  has  been  so  considered, 
until  very  recently,  but  the  latest  discoveries 
have  exploded  this  idea,  and  have  shown  the 
Atom  is  composed  of  certain  other  Things,  as 
we  shall  see  a  little  later  on.  Still  we  may  use 
the  Atom  as  a  very  good  unit  of  measurement, 
for  it  still  represents  the  unit  of  chemical  Sub- 
stance, just  as  the  molecule  is  the  unit  of 
physical  Substance.  In  order  that  you  may 
understand  the  difference  between  Molecules 
and  Atoms — physical  units,  and  chemical  units, 
let  us  give  you  a  few  examples. 

Take  a  molecule  of  water — the  physical  unit, 
you  remember.  When  it  is  chemically  sepa- 
rated or  analyzed,  it  is  found  to  contain  two 

69 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

atoms  of  hydrogen,  and  one  atom  of  oxygen — 
both  chemical  units,  remember — ^which  when 
united  and  combined,  form  water,  but  which 
when  separated  are  simple  atoms  of  certain 
chemical  gases.  The  proportion  in  water  is 
always  the  same,  two  of  hydrogen  and  one  of 
oxygen — this  is  the  only  partnership  that  will 
form  water.  The  molecule  of  table  salt  con- 
tains one  atom  of  sodium  and  one  of  chlorine. 
The  molecule  of  air  contains  five  chemical 
gases,  of  which  nitrogen  and  oxygen  are  the 
principal  ones,  the  proportion  being  about 
three  parts  of  nitrogen  to  one  of  oxygen.  Some 
molecules  are  far  more  complex,  for  instance 
the  molecule  of  sugar  is  composed  of  forty-five 
chemical  atoms,  and  sulphuric  acid  of  seven. 
An  atom  is  estimated  at  one-250,000,000th  of  an 
inch  in  diameter. 

But  this  is  not  all.  The  old  theory  of  the 
finality,  and  ultimateness  of  the  Atom  has  been 
shattered  by  the  recent  discoveries  of  Science. 
The  atom  of  Hydrogen  was  formerly  consid- 
ered to  be  the  refinement  of  Substance — the 
Ultimate  Atom — the  smallest  and  finest  Atom 
possible  or  known — the  last  thing  that  could  be 
imagined  about  Substance.  Some  even  went 
so  far  as  to  declare  that  the  Atom  of  Hydrogen 
was  the  Ultimate  Element,  that  is  the  Element 
out  of  which  all  other  atoms  were  made — the 

70 


THE  STOBY  OF  SUBSTANCE 

mother  of  Atoms — the  Origin  of  Substance.  It 
was  supposed  that  all  other  Atoms  of  Matter 
were  composed  of  a  varying  number  of  hydro- 
gen Atoms,  which  themselves  were  **  vortex- 
rings  in  the  Ether'' — and  that  analysis  could  go 
no  further.  Science  rested  on  its  oars,  and 
pronounced  the  work  of  a  century  completed. 

But  alas!  no  sooner  was  this  position 
reached,  than  the  discovery  of  Eadiant  Matter 
and  the  formulation  of  the  *' Corpuscle  The- 
ory'* brought  down  the  whole  theoretical  struc- 
ture, and  Science  was  compelled  to  take  up  the 
hunt  again,  and  to  probe  further  into  the  inner 
recesses  of  Things  for  the  Ultimate  Thing. 
But,  nevertheless.  Atoms  still  exist,  although 
their  finality  is  no  longer  urged.  The  facts  re- 
main, although  the  theory  has  fallen. 

Let  us  see  about  this  latest  theory — the  Cor- 
puscle or  Electron  Theory.  The  discovery  of 
Eadiant  Matter,  and  the  investigation  of  the 
late  discovery  of  Radium,  has  led  to  the  fur- 
ther discovery  that  each  Atom,  instead  of  being 
a  **thing-in-itself"  is  a  little  mass  containing 
numerous  other  '* Things''  called  ** Corpuscles" 
(or  ** Electrons,"  because  electrified).  The  the- 
ory is  this,  briefly :  That  each  Atom  is  a  minute 
mass  of  Substance  containing  a  number  of 
** electrified  particles,"  which  are  known  as 
Electrons,  in  constant  motion  and  vibration,  re- 

71 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

volving  around  each  other,  as  do  the  planets, 
suns,  and  moons  of  the  Universe — in  fact  each 
chemical  Atom  is  like  unto  a  Universe  in  itself. 
The  simplest  Atom — that  which  was  supposed 
to  be  the  ^* Ultimate  Atom'' — the  Atom  of  Hy- 
drogen— ^is  supposed  to  contain  within  its  tiny 
self  no  less  than  1,000  minute  Corpuscles,  which 
because  electrified  are  called  ^^ Electron,''  re- 
volving in  fixed  and  regular  orbits  within  the 
containing  globe  of  the  Atom.  The  more  com- 
plex forms  of  Atoms  are  supposed  to  contain  a 
far  greater  number  of  Electrons,  the  authorities 
estimating  those  in  an  Atom  of  Oxygen  at 
10,000;  those  in  an  Atom  of  Gold,  100,000;  and 
those  in  an  Atom  of  Eadium,  150,000.  These 
figures  are  of  course  mere  ^^ scientific  guesses" 
but  when  compared  with  the  similar  ** guess" 
regarding  the  size  of  the  Atom,  they  give  a 
startling  illustration  of  the  size  of  the  newly 
discovered  Corpuscle  or  Electron. 

Another  authority,  for  an  illustration,  asks 
us  to  consider  a  great  globe  about  100  feet  in 
diameter — that  is,  of  course,  100  feet  through 
its  centre.  Let  the  globe  represent  the  Atom. 
Then  imagine  1,000  minute  *' specks,"  each  the 
size  of  a  pin-point,  composed  of  Substance,  and 
each  containing,  as  in  a  capsule,  an  atom  of 
electricity.  Each  *' speck"  is  revolving  around 
each  other  in  a  regular  orbit,  in  that  great  '*100 

.72 


THE  STORY  OF  SUBSTANCE 

feet  through''  globe,  and  keeping  well  away 
from  one  another.  That  will  give  you  an  idea 
of  the  relative  size  of  the  Electrons  and  Atoms, 
and  the  room  that  the  former  have  to  move 
about  in — good  many  feet  between  each,  you 
will  notice.  Lots  of  room,  and  plenty  to  spare. 
Try  to  figure  out  the  size  of  an  Electron. 

Many  readers  of  the  magazines  have  been 
confused  as  to  the  relation  between  the  Cor- 
puscles and  the  Electrons  (or  Ions,  as  some 
have  called  the  latter.)  The  matter  is  very 
simple.  They  are  both  the  same.  The  Cor- 
puscle is  the  tiny  particle  of  Matter,  which  be- 
cause it  is  electrified  and  has  thus  become  the 
**unit  of  electricity,''  is  called  an  ^^ Electron." 
From  the  viewpoint  of  Substance  we  call  the 
tiny  particle  a  ** Corpuscle" — from  the  view- 
point of  Electricity,  we  call  it  an  ** Electron." 

These  Electrons  are  the  tiny  particles  that 
pour  forth  from  the  pole  in  the  Crookes '  Tube, 
and  constitute  what  are  known  as  *^X  Rays," 
** Cathode  Rays,"  ^^Becquerel  Rays,"  etc. 
They  also  are  the  particles  that  are  thrown  off 
and  emitted  by  Radium,  and  similar  sub- 
stances. They  exist  in  the  Atom,  as  explained, 
but  also  are  found  **free"  and  independent, 
and  in  the  last  condition  or  state  are  thrown  off 
in  the  aforesaid  **Rays,"  and  by  Radium,  etc. 
So   far   the    Corpuscles    are   known    only   as 

73 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

charged  with  Electricity,  and  the  Electron  only 
as  a  tiny  charge  of  Electricity  with  which  the 
Corpuscle  is  charged.  But  Science  dreams  of 
Corpuscles  of  Substance  other  than  Electrons, 
in  which  case  the  old  Occult  teachings  of  '*  light 
dusf  and  **heat  dust,'*  etc.,  will  be  verified. 

The  Electron  contains  a  powerful  charge  of 
Electricity,  as  much  in  fact  as  an  Atom,  1,000 
to  150,000  times  its  size  will  carry.  But  Sci- 
ence is  wondering  how  these  highly  charged 
particles  manage  to  hold  together  in  the  Atom, 
so  rigidly  coherent  as  to  appear  indestructible. 
We  think  that  we  may  get  a  hint  at  the  matter 
a  little  later  on  in  this  book. 

Science,  or  at  least  some  scientists,  are  won- 
dering whether  the  ^'whirP'  or  vibration  of  the 
Corpuscle  might  not  produce  that  which  we  call 
''Electricity,"  and  whether,  when  this  motion 
is  intensified,  waves  of  Electricity  will  not  be 
emitted.  The  writer  fully  agrees  with  this 
idea,  and  finds  that  it  fits  closely  his  own  the- 
ories regarding  Substance  and  Motion.  But 
the  reader  is  cautioned  against  falling  into  the 
error  of  many  recent  popular  writers  on  the 
subject,  some  of  whom  have  used  terms  calcu- 
lated to  convey  the  idea  that  the  Corpuscle 
(Electron)  is  Electricity  itself,  rather  than  tiny 
particles  of  Substance  called  Corpuscles, 
charged  with  the  unitary  charge  of  Electricity, 

74 


THE  STOBY  OF  SUBSTANCE 

and  therefore  called  *^ Electrons/'  But  for 
that  matter,  Electricity  is  only  known  to  us  as 
associated  with  some  form  of  Substance,  and 
not  as  **a  thing-in-itself . ' '  We  shall  see  the 
reason  for  this  as  we  proceed  with  this  book. 
These  Corpuscles  are  destined  to  play  a  most 
important  part  in  the  theories  of  Science  from 
now  on.  They  already  have  overturned  sev- 
eral very  carefully  and  laboriously  erected  the- 
oretical structures — and  many  more  will  fol- 
low, among  the  many  important  ones  evidently 
doomed  to  the  dust-heap  being  the  **  vortex- 
ring '*  atomic  theory,  and  other  theories  built 
upon  the  Etheric  origin  of  Matter,  and  other 
theories  concerning  the  Ether,  even  to  the  ex- 
tent of  breaking  down  the  theory  of  The  Ether 
itself,  which  theory  had  almost  come  to  be  con- 
sidered a  Law. 

We  shall  further  consider  the  Corpuscles, 
and  their  qualities,  characteristics,  etc.,  in  the 
next  chapter,  for  they  have  an  important  bear- 
ing upon  the  theories  advanced  in  the  course  of 
the  study  of  this  book. 


75 


CHAPTER  VI 

SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

CCIENCE  has  ascribed  to  Substance  certain 
^  characteristic  qualities  which  it  calls 
** Properties/'  It  divides  these  properties  into 
two  classes,  viz.:  (1)  Molecular  Properties 
(sometimes  called  Physical  Properties) ;  and 
(2)  Atomic  Properties  (sometimes  called  Chem- 
ical Properties). 

Molecular  Properties  are  those  which  may  be 
manifested  by  Substance  without  disturbing 
the  Molecules,  and  consequently  without  affect- 
ing the  **kind''  of  Substance. 

Atomic  Properties  are  those  which  concern 
the  Atoms  when  free  from  Molecular  combina- 
tion, and  which  consequently  cannot  be  mani- 
fested without  changing  the  *^kind''  of  Sub- 
stance. 

Science,  before  long,  is  likely  to  add  a  third 
class  of  Properties,  namely,  *^  Corpuscular 
Properties/'  relating  to  the  Corpuscles  or  par- 
ticles of  Radiant  Matter,  but,  so  far,  it  has  not 
had  the  opportunity  to  sufficiently  observe  these 
qualities,  except  in  a  general  way. 

76 


I 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

There  are  certain  General  Properties  that 
seem  possessed  by  both  Mass,  Molecules,  and 
Atoms — and  probably  by  Corpuscles. 

These  General  Properties  are  as  follows : 

Shape:  That  property  whereby  Substance 
*^ takes  up  room/'  This  property  manifests  in 
three  directions,  called  Dimensions  of  Space, 
namely,  Length,  Breadth,  and  Thickness. 

Weight:  That  property  whereby  Substance 
responds  to  Gravity.  Weight  is  simply  the 
measure  of  the  attraction. 

Impenetrability:  That  property  whereby 
two  bodies  of  Substance  are  prevented  from 
occupying  the  same  space  at  the  same  time. 
A  nail  driven  into  a  piece  of  wood,  simply 
pushes  aside  the  molecules,  and  occupies  the 
Space  between  them.  Substance  is  never 
actually  *4nvaded''  or  its  actual  territory 
occupied  by  other  Substance. 

Indestructibility:  That  property  whereby 
Substance  is  prevented  from  being  destroyed 
or  annihilated.  Although  the  forms  of  Sub- 
stance may  be  changed,  or  transformed  into 
other  forms,  still.  Substance  in  itself  is  not 
destroyed,  and  cannot  be  under  the  existing 
Laws  of  the  Universe. 

Mobility:  That  property  whereby  Substance 
responds  to  imparted  Motion.  We  shall  notice 
this  property  in  our  consideration  of  Motion. 

77  - 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

In  addition  to  the  Motion  of  the  Mass,  and  the 
movements  of  Molecules  and  Atoms  in  re- 
sponse to  its  Attraction,  there  is  another  form 
of  Motion  constantly  going  on,  without  refer- 
ence to  the  Attraction  or  impressed  Motion  of 
the  Mass.  The  Molecules  of  all  bodies  are 
always  in  a  state  of  rapid  Motion,  called  Vibra- 
tion. In  solids  this  vibration  is  short,  being 
restrained  by  the  close  cohesive  position  of  the 
Molecules.  But  in  Liquids,  the  Molecules 
being  further  separated,  the  vibration  is  far 
more  rapid,  and  they  move  around  and  slide 
over  each  other  with  comparatively  little  re- 
sistance. In  gases  and  vapors  the  Molecules 
have  a  splendid  field  for  Motion,  and  conse- 
quently vibrate  in  wide  fields  and  orbits,  and 
dash  around  with  the  greatest  velocity.  The 
Atoms  also  are  believed  to  vibrate  rapidly,  in 
accordance  with  their  own  laws  of  vibration. 
And  the  Corpuscles  are  believed  to  far  excel 
the  last  two  mentioned  particles  in  intensity, 
rapidity  and  complexity  of  their  vibrations,  as 
we  shall  see  a  little  later  on  in  the  book.  All 
Substance  is  in  constant  Motion  and  Vibration. 
There  is  no  Eest  in  Substance. 

Inertia:  That  property  whereby  Substance 
may  not  move  unless  in  response  to  imparted 
Motion;  nor  terminate  its  Motion,  when  it  is 
once  imparted,   except  in  response  to   some 

78 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

other  manifestation  of  impressed  Force.  Sci- 
ence holds  that  this  **  impressed  Force '*  or  **  im- 
parted Motion''  must  come  from  without,  but 
the  writer  holds  that  Force  may  also  be  **  ex- 
pressed'' from  *' within,"  as  may  be  seen  by 
reference  to  subsequent  chapters  of  this  book. 

Attraction:  That  property  whereby  par- 
ticles or  bodies  of  Substance  (1)  draw  other 
particles  or  bodies  toward  themselves;  or  (2) 
move  toward  other  particles  or  bodies;  or  (3) 
are  mutually  drawn  together.  This  property 
manifests  in  four  forms,  generally  referred  to 
as  separate  and  distinct  from  each  other,  but 
which  the  writer  believes  to  be  but  forms  of  the 
same  Attractive  Power,  and  which  he  believes 
to  be  a  Mental  Process,  at  the  last  analysis  (a 
revolutionary  claim,  which  will  be  supported  by 
argument  in  later  chapters  of  the  book).  These 
three  forms  of  Attraction  are  known  as  (1) 
Gravitation;  (2)  Cohesion;  (3)  Adhesion;  and 
(4)  Chemical  Affinity,  or  Chemism.  We  are 
invited  to  consider  them  briefly,  at  this  point, 
further  investigation  being  reserved  for  our 
chapters  on  Motion,  and  Dynamic  Thought. 

Gravitation:  This  term  is  usually  applied 
to  the  attraction  between  Masses  of  Substance, 
such  as  the  Sun,  the  Earth,  and  Masses  of  Sub- 
stance on  or  about  the  Earth's  surface.  How- 
ever,  Newton,   who   discovered  the   facts   of 

79 


I 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Gravitation,  states  the  Law,  as:  ** Every  par- 
ticle of  matter  in  the  Universe,  attracts  every 
other  particle/*  etc. 

Cohesion:  This  term  is  used  to  indicate  the 
attraction  between  Molecules,  by  which  they 
are  combined  into  Masses  or  Bodies.  Cohe- 
sion causes  the  Molecules  to  unite  and  cling  to- 
gether, thus  forming  the  Mass. 

Adhesion:  This  term  is  used  to  indicate  the 
attraction  between  Masses  which  causes  them 
to  *^ stick  together''  without  a  cohesion  of  their 
Molecules.  Adhesion  operates  through  the 
adjacent  surfaces  of  the  two  Masses.  It  may 
be  considered  as  a  ** lesser''  form  of  cohesion. 

Chemical  Affinity  (sometimes  called  Chem- 
ism  or  Atomic  Attraction) :  This  term  is  used 
to  indicate  the  attraction  between  the  atoms,  by 
which  they  combine,  unite  and  cling  together, 
forming  the  Molecule. 

Science  has  before  it  the  task  of  naming,  and 
classifjdng,  the  attraction  between  the  Corpus- 
cles, by  which  they  combine  and  form  the  Atom. 
But  whatever  the  name,  it  will  be  seen  that  it 
represents  but  another  manifestation  of  **  At- 
traction." 

Arising  from  Molecular  Attraction,  or  Co- 
hesion, are  several  ''Properties'*  peculiar  to 
Masses  having  Molecules,  and  resulting  from 
the  tendency  of  the  latter  to  resist  separation. 

80 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

We  had  better  consider  them  briefly,  in  order  to 
understand  the  power  of  Molecular  Attraction, 
and  its  incidents. 

Porosity:  That  property  indicating  the 
distances  observed  by  the  Molecules  in  their 
relation  to  each  other,  which  varies  in  different 
** kinds''  of  Substance.  All  Substance  is  more 
or  less  Porous,  that  is,  has  more  or  less  space 
existing  between  the  Molecules — the  degree  de- 
pends upon  the  ** closeness."  Compressibility 
and  Expansibility,  sometimes  mentioned  as 
*^ properties,"  are  but  results  of  Porosity. 

Elasticity:  'That  property  whereby  bodies 
resume  their  original  size  and  form,  after  hav- 
ing been  compressed,  expanded  or  '*bent." 
The  result  is  caused  by  the  inclination  of  the 
molecules  to  resume  their  original  positions. 
What  is  sometimes  called  ^^ Plasticity"  is 
merely  the  reverse  of  Elasticity,  and  denotes  a 
limited  degree  of  the  latter. 

Hardness:  That  condition  resulting  from 
Molecular  Attraction  resisting  the  forcible  en- 
trance and  passage  of  other  Substance  between 
the  molecules. 

Tenacity:  That  condition  resulting  from 
Molecular  Attraction  resisting  the  forcible 
pulling  asunder,  or  tearing  apart  of  the  Mass. 
This  condition  sometimes  is  cajled  **  Tough- 
ness." 

81 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Malleability:  That  condition  resulting  from 
Molecular  Attraction  resisting  the  forcible 
separation  of  the  Mass  by  pounding,  hammer- 
ing or  pressure.  The  resistance  is  ** passive,^* 
and  consists  of  the  Molecules  allowing  them- 
selves to  assume  a  spread-out  formation, 
rather  than  to  be  forced  apart. 

Ductility:  That  condition  resulting  from 
Molecular  Attraction  resisting  the  forcible 
separation  of  the  Mass  by  a  **  drawing  ouf 
process.  The  resistance  is  ''passive,"  and 
consists  of  the  Molecules  allowing  themselves 
to  be  drawn  out  into  a  formation  of  the  shape 
of  wire  or  thread,  rather  than  to  be  pulled 
apart. 

In  any  of  the  above  cases,  we  may  intelli- 
gently, and  with  propriety,  substitute  the 
words,  *^Molecules,  by  means  of  cohesion,  re- 
sisting, etc.,"  for  the  terms  above  used,  ''Mol- 
ecular Attraction,  resisting,  etc." 

All  Masses  of  Substance  (probably  Molecules 
as  well)  are  capable  of  Expansion  and  Contrac- 
tion, both  phenomena,  in  fact,  and  in  degree, 
resulting  from  the  relation  of  the  Molecules. 
Contraction  is  a  "crowding  together"  of  the 
Molecules;  Expansion  a  "getting  apart"  of 
them. 

Density:  The  amount  of  Substance  in  rela- 
tior  to  a  given  bulk.    Volume — ^the  "size"  or 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

**bulk'*  of  a  body  of  Substance.  Mass — Be- 
sides being  used  to  designate  a  **body''  of  Sub- 
stance, composed  of  two  or  more  Molecules,  the 
term  **Mass"  is  used  to  designate  the  *^  total 
quantity  of  Substance  in  a  Body.'*  An  appli- 
cation of  the  above  terms  may  be  seen  in  the 
following  illustration : 

A  quart  of  water  occupies  a  certain  space — 
and  has  a  certain  **  volume, '^  **mass^'  and 
'^density/'  Convert  the  same  ^^mass'^  of 
Water  into  Steam,  and  it  expands  to  a  **  vol- 
ume'' of  1700  times  that  of  Water — ^but,  as  no 
molecules  have  been  added,  the  **mass''  re- 
mains the  same — ^but  as  a  quart  of  Steam 
weighs  1700  times  less  than  the  same  '*  vol- 
ume'' of  Water,  the  *' density"  of  Steam  is 
1700  times  less  than  that  of  Water.  As  the 
'* volume"  of  a  given  *'mass"  increases,  the 
*' density"  decreases  in  the  same  proportion — 
but  the  /'mass"  remains  the  same.  ''Mass" 
therefore  has  two  factors,  i.  e.,  "Volume"  and 
"Density."  The  "Density"  of  a  "Mass"  is 
determined  by  the  weight  of  a  certain  "Vol- 
ume" of  it. 

The  above  consideration  of  the  "Proper- 
ties" of  Substance  dealt  only  with  the  Molec- 
ular Properties,  or  Physical  Properties,  as  they 
are  sometimes  called — that  is,  with  properties 
depending  upon  the  existence  of  the  Molecules. 

83 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

When  we  consider  the  Molecules  as  being  com- 
posed of  Atoms,  and  when  we  consider  the 
processes  whereby  these  Molecules  are  built  up 
of,  or  broken  down  through  the  separation  of 
Atoms,  we  come  to  the  subject  of  Atomic  Prop- 
erties, or  Chemical  Properties,  as  they  are 
often  called. 

The  Atomic  Properties  of  Substance  consist 
principally  in  the  power  and  manifestation  of 
Motion,  in  the  direction  of  combination,  sepa- 
ration, and  the  complex  motions  resulting  from 
the  same.  This  Motion  is  manifested  by  rea- 
son of  Atomic  Attraction,  sometimes  called 
** Chemical  Affinity,''  which  we  shall  consider 
a  little  later  on  in  the  chapter. 

Atomic  Principles,  as  above  mentioned,  are 
best  illustrated  by  a  reference  to  Chemical 
changes,  and  we  shall  now  examine  the  same. 
And,  the  better  way  to  consider  Chemical 
Changes  is  by  comparing  them  with  Physical 
Changes,  or  Changes  of  the  Molecules. 

Some  Physical  Changes  in  Substance  are 
brought  about  by  Heat,  which  tends  to  separate 
the  molecules,  or  rather  to  allow  them  to  spread 
out  away  from  each  other,  so  long  as  the  high 
temperature  is  maintained,  the  degree  of  their 
nearness  being  influenced  by  temperature. 
Other  Physical  Changes  are  produced  by  out- 
side Forces  separating  the  molecules  to  such 

84 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

an  extent — to  such  a  distance — that  their  co- 
hesive force  is  lost,  and  the  Solid  matter  is  said 
to  be  ** broken/'  or  even  reduced  to  dust. 
Other  physical  changes  are  brought  about  by 
Electricity,  causing  the  Molecules  to  separate 
and  disintegrate. 

Chemical  Changes,  as  distinguished  from 
Physical  Changes,  do  not  involve  or  deal  with 
Molecules,  the  action  being  solely  upon  the 
Atoms  of  which  the  Molecules  are  composed. 
Physical  Changes  separate  Molecules  from 
each  other,  while  Chemical  Changes  destroy 
and  break  up  the  Molecule,  so  that  its  identity 
is  forever  lost,  its  Atoms  thereafter  either  ex- 
isting free  from  combinations,  or  else  recom- 
bining  with  other  Atoms,  and  forming  new 
combinations.  Chemical  changes  are  occa- 
sioned by  either  physical  or  chemical  agencies. 
The  physical  agencies  generally  employed  are 
heat,  electricity,  light,  pressure,  percussion, 
etc.  The  principle  of  Chemical  Changes  is 
that  the  Atoms  are  possessed  of,  and  subject 
to,  what  is  called  ** Atomic  Attraction''  or 
** Chemical  Affinity,"  which  may  be  defined  as 
an  attraction  or  **love"  existing  in  varying 
degrees  between  Atoms.  This  Affinity  causes 
Atoms  of  one  element  to  seek  out  and  ally  them- 
selves to  Atoms  of  another  element,  the  element 

85 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

of  ** choice '*  or  ** preference"  being  strikingly 
in  evidence. 

Atoms  of  different  elements  form  mar- 
riages, and  cling  together  in  harmony,  until, 
perchance,  by  some  physical  or  chemical 
agency,  the  Molecule  is  brought  in  sufficiently 
close  connection  with  another  Molecule  com- 
posed of  different  elemental  atoms,  when,  alas ! 
one  of  Atoms  of  our  Molecule  finds  that  it  has 
a  greater  Affinity  for  some  other  elemental 
Atom  in  the  second  Molecule,  and  lo!  it  flies 
away,  leaving  its  first  partner,  and  seeking  the 
new  charmer.  Divorce  and  re-marriage  is  a 
common  thing  in  the  world  of  Atoms — in  fact. 
Chemistry  is  based  upon  these  qualities. 

Physical  and  Chemical  Changes  gradually 
transform  solid  rock  to  '* earth"  or  ^^soil." 
Disintegration,  by  the  action  of  changes  in  tem- 
perature, rains  and  atmospheric  influences,  and 
other  Physical  Changes,  have  slowly  worn 
down  the  rocks  into  **dirt,"  gravel,  clay,  loam, 
etc.  And  Decomposition  by  Chemical  Change 
that  set  the  atoms  free  from  their  combinations 
has  aided  in  the  work. 

There  is  no  rest  in  the  world  of  Substance. 
Everything  is  changing — constantly  changing. 
Old  forms  give  way  to  new,  and  these,  grown 
old  while  being  bom,  are,  in  turn  replaced  by 
still  newer.    And  on,  endlessly.    Nothing  per- 

86 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

sists  but  change.  And  yet  nothing  is  de- 
stroyed, although  countless  forms  and  shapes 
have  succeeded  each  other.  Substance  is  al- 
ways there,  undisturbed  and  unaffected  by  the 
varieties  of  forms  it  is  compelled  to  undergo. 
Masses  may  change — and  do  change.  Molecules 
may  change — and  do  change.  Disintegration 
and  decomposition  affect  both,  and  bring  to 
them  the  death  of  form.  But  their  substance 
endures  in  the  Atom.  Atoms  may  change,  and 
decompose,  or  undergo  whatever  change  that  is 
their  fate,  and  still  the  Corpuscles,  or  what  lies 
beyond  the  Corpuscles  will  remain.  The  Atom 
was  once  regarded  as  Eternal,  but  now  even  it 
seems  to  be  capable  of  dissolving  into  some 
finer  division  of  Substance — and  perhaps  still 
finer  subdivisions  await  it. 

That  familiar  form  of  Substance  that  we  call 
''earth,''  ''dirt,"  "soil,"  etc.,  is  but  the  result 
of  disintegrated  rock,  which  has  crumbled  and 
lost  its  former  form  through  the  action  of  air, 
water  and  atmospheric  influences.  And  the 
rocks  themselves,  from  which  the  "soil"  came, 
were  at  one  time  a  sea  of  melted,  flowing  liquid 
Substance,  somewhat  resembling  volcanic  lava. 
And  this  "melted  rock"  is  thought  to  have  been 
condensed  from  the  same  principles  in  the 
shape  of  vapor,  that  existed  in  the  early  days 
of  our  planetary  system.    Vapor,  gas,  liquid, 

87 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

semi-liquid,  solid  rock,  ^'soiP' — the  Substance 
unchanged,  the  forms  totally  unlike.  Helm- 
holtz  estimates  the  density  of  the  nebulous  va- 
pors of  Substance  as  being  so  rare  that  it  would 
take  several  millions  of  cubic  miles  of  it  to 
weigh  a  single  grain.  Oh,  Nature,  .what  a 
wizard  thou  art ! 

We  have  spoken  of  Air  and  Water,  in  a  for- 
mer chapter,  and  their  constituent  atoms  have 
been  named.  And  from  these  three  great  res- 
ervoirs of  Substance — the  Earth,  the  Air,  and 
the  Water — are  obtained  all  the  material  that 
goes  to  form  the  bodies  of  the  animal  and  vege- 
table kingdoms.  The  plant  draws  its  nourish- 
ment from  the  soil,  the  air,  and  water,  and  in 
its  wonderful  chemical  laboratory  is  able  to 
transform  the  elements  so  drawn  from  these 
sources  into  a  substance  called  ^* Plasm,''  which 
consists  principally  of  carbon,  oxygen,  nitro- 
gen and  hydrogen,  being  nearly  identical  in 
composition  to  the  white  of  an  egg,  and  which 
constitutes  the  basis  of  animal  and  plant  bodily 
structures.  All  the  material  of  the  physical 
bodies,  of  men,  animals  and  plants,  are  but 
forms  of  Plasm.  The  animals,  and  man,  ob- 
tain their  nourishment,  directly  or  indirectly, 
from  the  plant  body,  and  so  at  the  last  we  are 
seen  to  draw  from  the  soil,  air  and  water  all  our 
bodily   nourishment,    which   we    convert   into 

88 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

bodily  structure,  bone,  muscle,  flesh,  blood, 
veins,  tissue,  cells,  etc.  And  the  chemical 
atoms  of  our  bodies  are  identical  with  those  in 
the  rock,  the  air,  the  water.  And  so  you  see 
the  universality  of  Substance  and  its  countless 
forms  and  appearances. 

Chemistry  resolves  Substance  back  into 
about  seventy-five  simple  substances,  of  which 
Atoms  are  the  Units,  which  simple  substances 
are  called  *  ^  Elements. ' '  From  these  Elements 
(by  their  Atoms)  all  other  substances  are 
formed  by  combinations,  the  number  of  such 
possible  combinations  being  infinite.  An  Ele- 
ment (in  order  to  be  an  element)  must  be  a 
** simple''  substance,  that  is,  must  be  incapable 
of  further  analysis  into  some  other  elements. 
The  seventy-five  elements,  now  recognized  by 
science,  have  never  been  resolved  into  other 
elements,  by  chemical  analysis,  and  therefore 
are  accepted  as  ** simple."  But,  it  is  true  that 
other  substances  that  were  formerly  consid- 
ered as  simple  elements  were  afterward  decom- 
posed by  electricity,  and  found  to  consist  of 
two  or  more  simpler  substances  or  elements. 
Thus  new  elements  were  discovered,  and  old 
ones  discarded  as  *' not-elemental.''  And  this 
fate  may  be  in  store  for  a  number  of  the  ele- 
ments now  on  the  list — and  many  new  ones 
may  be  discovered. 

89     . 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

For  a  long  time  Science  was  endeavoring  to 
trace  all  elements  back  to  Hydrogen,  the  latter 
being  considered  the  ** Ultimate  Element/' 
and  its  atoms  composing  all  the  other  atoms, 
under  varying  conditions,  etc.  But  this  theory 
is  now  almost  abandoned,  and  Science  rests  on 
its  list  of  seventy-five  elements,  the  atoms  of 
which  are  composed  of  '^Electrons.''  Some 
have  hazarded  the  theory  that  the  Elements 
were  all  forms  of  Ether  (see  next  chapter), 
their  apparent  differences  resulting  merely 
from  the  varying  rate  of  vibration,  etc.  And, 
in  fact,  such  theory  was  about  finally  adopted 
as  a  working  hypothesis  until  the  discovery  of 
the  Corpuscle.  Everything  in  Substance  now 
seems  to  be  moving  back  to  the  Corpuscle,  as 
we  shall  see  a  little  further  on. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  principal  Ele- 
ments, known  to  Science,  to-day: 


Aluminum. 

Antimony. 

Arsenic. 

Barium. 

Bismuth. 

Boron. 

Bromine. 

Cadmium. 

Calcium. 

Carbon. 

Chlorine. 

Chromium. 

Cobalt. 

Copper. 

Fluorine. 

Gold. 

Hydrogen. 

lodme. 

Iron. 

Lead. 

90 

SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 


Magnesium.  Manganese. 

Mercury.  Nickel. 

Nitrogen.  Oxygen. 

Phosphorus.  Platinum. 

Potassium.  Eadium. 

Silicon.  Silver. 

Sodium.  Strontium. 

Sulphur.  Tin. 

Zinc. 

Of  the  above,  Hydrogen  is  by  far  the  lightest 
in  weight ;  in  fact  it  is  used  as  a  unit  of  Atomic 
Weight,  its  weight  being  marked  **1''  on  the 
scale;  Gold,  197;  Lead,  207;  Silver,  108;  Oxy- 
gen,  16;  Nitrogen,  14;  Iron,  56. 

The  discovery  of  the  Corpuscle,  or  Electron, 
rudely  shattered  the  vortex-ring  theory  of  the 
origin  of  the  Atom,  and  now,  instead  of  the 
Atom  being  regarded  as  a  ** vortex-ring''  in 
that  hypothetical,  paradoxical  absurdity,  the 
Ether,  it  is  believed  to  be  composed  of  a  vast 
number  of  tiny  particles  called  Corpuscles,  as 
we  saw  stated  in  our  last  chapter.  These 
Corpuscles  seem  to  be  the  **last  thing  in  Sub- 
stance''— its  last  known  state  of  refinement, 
and  already  it  is  being  proclaimed  as  the  long- 
sought  for  '* Primal  Matter,"  or  ** Ultimate 
Substance."  Whether  or  not  a  still  finer  state 
of  Substance  will  be  discovered  Science  is  un- 
able to  say,  but  thinks  it  unlikely.    But  we 

91 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

must  not  overlook  the  old  Occult  Teaching  indi- 
cating a  state  of  Substance  so  fine  that  it  is  im- 
perceptible, and  only  recognizable  as  apparent- 
ly **free  force' ';  its  covering,  or  vehicle  of  Sub- 
stance not  being  evident.  This  would  seem  to 
indicate  a  still  further  refinement  of  Substance, 
although  perhaps  the  **  Corpuscle ' '  or  **  Elec- 
tron'* will  answer  to  *^fill  the  bilP'  in  the  case. 

As  to  the  Corpuscle  being  *^  Primal  Sub- 
stance,'' it  must  be  admitted  that  its  advocates 
have  presented  a  very  strong  case.  One  of 
their  most  important  points  is  that  although 
Molecules  differ  very  materially  from  each 
other,  according  to  their  kinds;  and  while 
Atoms  likewise  manifest  very  plainly  their 
**kind,"  the  Corpuscle  seems  to  possess  only 
one  ^'kind/*  no  matter  from  what  form  or 
**kind"  of  Substance  it  is  thrown  off.  Just 
think  what  this  means.  It  means  that  the  finest 
particles  of  Gold,  Silver,  Iron,  Hydrogen,  Oxy- 
gen, and  all  the  rest  of  the  Elements,  are  com- 
posed of  identically  the  same  material,  and  ex- 
hibit no  differences  in  ^^hind.^*  The  Elements 
are  no  longer  ^  *  Simple. ' '  All  Substance  is  One, 
at  the  last  analysis! 

The  Corpuscles  seem  to  possess  the  same 
Mass — to  carry  the  same  charge  of  Electricity 
— to  act  precisely  the  same — irrespective  of 
their  source.    No  difference  in  size,  mass  or 

92 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYOND 

character,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Atom — all  are 
identical,  save  in  the  rate  of  their  vibration  at 
the  time  of  observation,  which  is  simply  a  mat- 
ter of  more  or  less  Motion.  Space  seems  to  be 
flooded  with  these  tiny  particles — these  Units 
of  Substance.  They  stream  from  the  Sun;  the 
Stars;  and  every  body  highly  heated.  Like- 
wise they  stream  from  the  bodies  of  highly 
electrified  Substance.  Groups  of  these  Corpus- 
cles, absolutely  identical  in  nature,  size,  mass, 
etc.,  constitute  the  Atoms  of  the  Seventy-five 
Elements,  the  **kind''  of  Element  seemingly 
being  dependent  upon  the  number  and  arrange- 
ment of  the  Corpuscles,  and  possibly  by  their 
rate  of  vibration.  Every  Atom  is  like  a  great 
bee-hive  with  a  swarm  of  Corpuscles  vibrating, 
moving  around  each  other,  and  upon  their  own 
centres.  And,  if  by  the  action  of  intense  heat, 
transmitted,  or  caused  by  interrupted  Motion — 
or  if  by  a  strong  Electric  charge — some  of  these 
Corpuscles  are  detached  from  the  Atoms  (or 
possibly  an  Atom  broken  up),  they  fly  off 
through  Space  at  a  marvellous  speed  of  many 
thousand  miles  an  hour. 

So  we  see  that  these  wonderful  Corpuscles 
look  very  much  like  Primal  Matter  or  Ultimate 
Substance— the  '* Stuff''  out  of  which  Sub- 
stance is  made.  And,  taking  you  back  to  the 
chapter   on   '^The   Universality   of  Life   and 

93 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Mind,'*  the  writer  would  remind  you  that  in 
their  Motions  and  evident  Attraction,  etc.,  these 
Corpuscles  evidence  the  same  ^*Life  and  Mind'' 
that  we  observed  in  the  Molecules  and  Atoms. 
It  must  be  so,  for  what  is  in  the  manufactured 
article  must  be  in  the  material  of  which  the 
article  is  made.  And  so,  even  here.  Life  and 
Mind  have  not  escaped  us.  Nor  will  it  in  The 
Ether! 

And  speaking  of  the  Corpuscles,  as  **  manu- 
factured articles,"  we  are  reminded  of  Her- 
schePs  thought  about  the  Atoms,  when  they 
were  regarded  as  Primal  Matter  and  likely  to 
be  uniform,  and,  at  the  end,  of  one  primal  sub- 
stance. Although  HerschePs  conception  does 
not  now  apply  to  the  Atoms,  it  may  be  trans- 
ferred to  the  Corpuscles. 

Herschel  thought  that  the  fact  that  the  Par- 
ticles of  Substance  were  likely  to  be  found  to  be 
uniform  in  size,  and  identical  in  nature  and 
characteristics,  indicated  that  they  might  be 
akin  to  ** manufactured  articles,"  turned  out 
from  the  same  great  machinery  of  Creation. 
This  idea  would  indicate  that  the  Creator  ap- 
plied the  rules  of  careful  manufacture  to  the 
manufacture  of  the  Particles,  the  uniformity 
operating  in  the  direction  of  (1)  Economy  of 
Material;  (2)  Utility  through  interchangeabil- 
ity,  replacing  broken  or  discarded  parts,  etc.; 

94 


SUBSTANCE  AND  BEYONB 

and  also  (3)  Conformity  to  a  Standard  of  Size, 
Quality,  etc. 

The  thought  is  interesting,  and  is  mentioned 
here  for  that  reason.  It  is  not  affected  by  the 
supposition  that  there  may  be  a  still  finer  and 
rarer  form  of  Substance,  from  which  the  Parti- 
cles are  ''manufactured'' — ^in  fact,  the  idea  of 
Herschel,  if  closely  analyzed,  would  seem  to  indi- 
cate some  such  *'raw  material''  from  which  the 
articles  were  manufactured. 


95 


CHAPTEE  VII 

THE  PAEADOX  OF  SCIENCE 

TN  the  days  of  the  ancients,  when  the  phi- 
-*•  losophers  found  themselves  unable  to  ac- 
count for  any  particular  class  of  phenomena, 
they  bundled  it  together  and  referred  it  to  a 
suppositious  Something  that  they  called  *^The 
Ether/'  Finding  this  an  easy  way  to  get  rid 
of  vexatious  questions,  they  fell  into  the  cus- 
tom— and  the  habit  grew  upon  them.  Soon 
there  were  a  dozen  or  more  different  kind  of 
Ethers  in  vogue,  each  explaining  something 
else — the  ** something  else,*'  by  the  way,  being 
things  that  Science  now  feels  that  it  under- 
stands pretty  well.  These  Ethers  grew  to  be 
like  the  various  ** Vapors"  of  the  ancients — a 
dignified  term  for  ''We  don't  know" — a  re- 
spectable road  for  retreat  under  the  semblance 
of  an  advance. 

These  Ethers  became  a  scientific  scandal,  and 
caused  a  lax  mode  of  thinking  among  students 
of  those  times.    And  so  they  were  finally  abol- 

96 


THE  PABADOX  OF  SCIENCE 

ished  and  relegated  to  the  scrap  pile  of  Science, 
where  they  lay  for  many  centuries  until  a  com- 
paratively recent  period,  when  at  least  one  of 
them  was  hauled  forth,  dusted,  freshened  up  a 
little,  and  placed  upon  its  old  pedestal.  This 
revamped  Ether,  referred  to,  was  the  **  Ether 
of  Aristotle.''  Aristotle,  as  we  know,  was  a 
famous  Greek  philosopher  who  lived  about  350 
B.C. — about  2250  years  ago.  He  was  a  good 
man  and  a  celebrated  philosopher,  but  was 
somewhat  deficient  in  scientific  knowledge.  Al- 
though he  knew  many  things,  and  uttered  many 
wise  thoughts,  he  was  under  the  impression  that 
the  breath  of  Man  entered  the  heart  instead  of 
the  lungs — that  the  back  part  of  the  skull  was 
empty,  and  so  on.  He  was  without  the  advan- 
tages of  a  modern  training — which  was  not  his 
fault,  however. 

Well,  Aristotle  conceived  the  idea  of  an  Uni- 
versal Ether,  which  he  thought  pervaded  all 
space,  and  with  which  he  accounted  for  the 
passage  of  light  from  the  sun  and  stars;  the 
movements  of  the  planets,  and  various  other 
physical  phenomena.  It  is  not  known  whether 
Aristotle  really  believed  in  this  Ether,  or 
whether  he  merely  used  it  as  a  speculative 
hypothesis,  following  the  Ether  Habit  of  his 
contemporaries.  At  any  rate,  his  theory  served 
its  purpose — lived,  flourished,  declined  and  died 

97 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

— at  least  seemed  to  be  dead.  But  its  corpse 
was  resurrected  in  modern  times,  and  used  to 
account  for  divers  things. 

This  does  not  mean  that  modern  thinkers 
really  ** believe"  in  the  Universal  Ether — they 
merely  assume  it  as  a  working  hypothesis  until 
something  better  is  offered. 

Its  principal  modern  use  is  to  account  for 
the  transmission  of  Light  from  the  Sun  and 
Stars  to  the  Earth.  It  was  held  that  a  thing 
could  not  act  ^* where  it  was  not,"  and  so  it  be- 
came necessary  to  account  for  the  transmission 
either  by  the  theory  that  small  particles  of  sub- 
stance were  thrown  off  from  the  Sun,  and 
travelled  to  the  Earth,  or  else  that  there  was 
some  medium  of  communication  by  means  of 
vibrations,  etc.  Newton  held  to  the  first  theory, 
but  his  hypothesis  went  down  before  the  Ether 
advocates,  who  advanced  the  *  Vave-theory, " 
although  it  seems  that,  like  Banquo's  ghost, 
Newton's  theory  will  not  stay  down,  and  is  now 
taking  on  a  new  lease  of  life,  owing  to  the  dis- 
covery of  the  Corpuscle  and  Eadiant  Matter. 

The  Wave-theory  philosophers  asserted  that 
the  Light  and  Heat  of  the  Sun  were  thrown  off 
in  the  shape  of  Force  or  Energy,  and  trans- 
formed into  '* waves"  in  and  of  a  hypothetical 
Ether  (Aristotle's  own),  which  waves  were  car- 
ried to  the  Earth,  where,  meeting  Substance, 

98 


THE  PARADOX  OF  SCIENCE 

they  were  again  transformed  into  Heat  and 
Light. 

It  was  known  that  Light  and  Heat  travelled 
at  the  rate  of  184,000  miles  per  second,  and 
therefore  the  *' waves''  of  the  Ether  were  con- 
sidered to  have  that  speed.  The  Wave-theory 
seemed  to  fif  the  facts  of  the  case  better  than 
the  Newtonian  Theory  of  Corpuscles,  although 
the  latter  has  always  been  considered  as  better 
explaining  certain  phenomena  than  the  new 
theory.  And  so  the  Ether  Wave  became  gen- 
erally accepted,  and  remains  so  to-day,  although 
recent  discoveries  are  causing  a  disturbance  in 
the  scientific  camp  regarding  the  question. 

Later  it  was  discovered  that  the  Electricity 
travelled  at  the  same  rate  as  Light  and  Heat, 
and  the  Wave-of-the-Ether  theory  was  thus 
thought  to  have  additional  verification,  and 
Electricity  came  under  the  Law  and  remained 
there  until  the  Electron  discovery,  which  is 
causing  much  disturbance,  among  those  inter- 
ested in  the  study  of  Electricity. 

Briefly  stated,  the  theory  of  the  Universal 
Ether  is  this : 

That  pervading  all  Space  in  the  Universe — 
not  only  between  planets,  stars  and  suns,  but 
also  ** filling  in  the  cracks''  between  molecules, 
and  atoms  as  well — there  is  a  subtle  Substance 
in  and  through  which  the  waves  of  Light,  Heat, 

99 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Electricity  and  Magnetism  travel  at  the  rate  of 
184,000  per  second.  This  Substance  is  said  to 
be  ** Matter  that  is  not  Matter" — in  fact,  Sci- 
ence does  not  venture  to  say  just  what  it  is,  al- 
though it  freely  states  just  what  some  of  its 
properties  must  be,  and,  alas !  these  properties 
are  most  contradictory  and  opposite  to  each 
other,  as  we  shall  see  as  we  proceed. 

This  Universal  Ether  is  purely  hypothetical. 
It  has  been  called  a  * 'necessity  of  Science" — 
something  assumed  for  the  purpose  of  explain- 
ing or  accounting  for  certain  phenomena.  It 
is  undemonstrated  and  unproved — in  fact,  may 
truthfully  be  said  to  be  undemonstrable  and  un- 
provable. Some  have  gone  so  far  as  to  say 
that  its  claimed  properties  and  qualities  render 
it  *' unthinkable "  as  well.  And  yet,  Science 
finds  itself  compelled  to  assume  that  the  Ether, 
or  '* something  like  it"  exists,  or  else  cease 
speculating  about  it.  It  belongs  to  the  realm 
of  pure  theory,  and  yet,  many  writers  treat  it  as 
if  it  were  a  positively  demonstrated  and  proven 
fact.  Let  us  examine  into  the  nature  of  Sci- 
ence's problem,  and  her  attempted  solution,  and 
the  trouble  arising  therefrom. 

Light  travels  at  the  rate  of  184,000  miles  a 
second.  Remember,  that  Light  and  Heat  are 
that  which  we  call  by  those  names  only  when 
considered  in  connection  with  Substance.    Ac- 

100 


THE  PARADOX  OF  SCIENCE 

cording  to  the  theory,  Light  in  the  Sun's  at- 
mosphere is  transformed  into  a  Light-wave  of 
the  Ether  on  its  travels  to  the  earth,  and  only 
when  the  **wave'*  comes  in  contact  with  the 
Substance  on  the  earth's  body  or  atmosphere 
does  it  become  again  transformed  into  Light  as 
we  know  it.  In  its  travels  through  space  it 
meets  with  no  Substance,  and  has  nothing  to 
*^turn  into  light'' — consequently  Space  (be- 
tween worlds)  is  in  a  state  of  absolute  darkness. 
The  same  is  true  of  Heat,  and  inter-world  Space 
is  absolutely  cold,  although  passing  through  it 
are  countless  heat-waves  of  great  intensity, 
which,  later  on,  will  be  transformed  into  Heat 
when  they  reach  the  Substance,  the  earth.  The 
same  is  true  of  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

Although  the  Ether,  as  we  have  seen,  is  a 
purely  theoretical  substance,  yet  Science  has 
found  it  reasonable  to  conclude  that  it  must  be 
possessed  of  certain  attributes  in  order  to  ac- 
count for  certain  known  facts.  Thus,  it  is  said 
to  be  frictionless,  else  the  worlds,  suns  and 
planeis  could  not  pass  freely  through  it,  nor 
could  the  light  and  heat  waves  travel  at  such  a 
tremendous  rate.  It  also  is  thought  to  have 
something  like  Inertia,  because  Motion  once 
started  in  it  persists  until  stopped ;  because  it  is 
at  a  state  of  rest  until  Motion  is  imparted  to  it ; 
and  because  it  takes  a  fraction  of  time  to  impart 

101^ 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

motion  to  it.  It  is  thought  to  be  different  from 
Substance  in  any  of  its  known  forms,  for  many- 
reasons,  among  such  being  the  fact  that  no 
known  form  of  Substance  could  carry  vibra- 
tions through  space  at  the  rate  of  184,000  miles 
a  second.  And  Light  and  Heat  waves  travel  at 
that  rate,  and  have  forms  and  shapes,  and 
lengths  of  their  own.  Light  for  instance,  vi- 
brates on  two  planes,  and  a  light-wave  is  some- 
thing like  a  Greek  cross,  thus  (-|-),  having  a 
horizontal  and  a  vertical  line,  or  plane  of  vibra- 
tion. And  the  Ether  cannot  be  a  fluid  of  any 
degree,  because  a  fluid  cannot  transmit  cross 
vibrations  at  all.  And  it  cannot  be  a  Solid,  be- 
cause a  Solid  could  not  stand  vibrations  at  such 
a  terrific  speed,  and  still  remain  a  Solid.  And 
yet,  to  transmit  the  two-plane  light  waves,  the 
Ether  must  have  a  certain  degree  of  Rigidity, 
else  the  waves  could  not  travel.  Lord  Kelvin 
estimated  this  degree  of  Eigidity  as  about 
19,000,000,000th  of  the  rigidity  of  the  hardest 
steel.  So,  you  see.  Science  is  compelled  to  as- 
sume that  the  Ether  is  ''a  continuous.  Friction- 
less  medium,  possessing  both  Inertia  and  Rigid- 
ity.'' Some  scientists  have  thought  it  to  be  a 
kind  of  *' elastic  jelly." 

Of  the  Ether,  Prof.  Oliver  Lodge  has  said, 
**We  have  to  try  and  realize  the  idea  of  a  per- 
fectly continuous,  subtle,  incompressible  sub- 

103 


THE  PARADOX  OF  SQENCB 

stance,  pervading  all  Space,  and  penetrating 
between  the  molecules  of  ordinary  Matter, 
which  are  imbedded  in  it,  and  connected  to  one 
another  by  its  means.  And  we  must  regard  it 
as  the  one  universal  medium  by  which  all  ac- 
tions between  bodies  are  carried  on.  This, 
then,  is  its  function — to  act  as  the  transmitter 
of  motion  and  energy. ' ' 

To  give  you  an  idea  of  the  wonderful  thing 
that  Science  is  compelled  to  think  of  the  Ether 
as  being,  by  reason  of  the  qualities  it  is  com- 
pelled to  ascribe  to  it — although  it  confesses 
itself  unable  to  ''imagine''  the  nature  of  the 
''Thing''  which  it  has  created  in  bits  by  the 
adding  and  bestowing  of  qualities  which  were 
made  necessary  by  the  logical  requirements  of 
the  case  —  let  us  take  a  hurried  view  of  the 
Thing  as  the  several  departments  of  Science 
say  it  must  be  thought  of. 

To  meet  the  requirements  of  the  case.  Science 
says  that  The  Universal  Ether  must  be  Sub- 
stan<;e  infinitely  more  rare  and  evanescent  than 
the  finest  gas  or  vapor  known  to  Science,  even 
in  its  rarest  condition.  It  must  convey  Heat  in 
the  manner  of  an  infinitely  Solid  body — and  yet 
it  must  not  be  a  Solid.  It  must  be  transparent 
and  invisible.  It  must  be  Frictionless,  and  yet 
Incompressible.  It  cannot  be  a  Fluid.  It  can- 
not have  Attraction  for  Substance,  such  as  all 

103 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Substance  has.  Nor  can  it  have  Weight — that 
te,  it  is  not  subject  to  Gravitation.  It  is  be- 
yond the  reach  of  any  known  scientific  instru- 
ment, even  of  the  greatest  power,  and  it  re- 
fuses to  register  itself  in  any  way,  either  to 
senses  or  instruments. 

It  cannot  be  known  *'of  itself,'*  but  may  only 
be  recognized  as  existent  by  the  ^* things"  for 
which  it  acts  as  a  medium  or  transmitting  agent. 
It  must  convey  Energy  and  Motion,  yet  it  must 
not  take  up  any  part  of  either  from  the  Matter 
in  its  midst.  It  must  not  absorb  any  of  the 
Heat,  Light  or  Electricity.  It  must  fill  up  the 
spaces  between  the  worlds,  as  well  as  the  most 
minute  space  between  the  Molecules,  Atoms  and 
Corpuscles,  or  any  other  minute  particle  of 
Substance,  either  known  by  name  to  Science 
now  or  which  may  be  discovered  or  imagined 
later  as  a  necessity  of  some  conception  regard- 
ing the  nature  of  Substance.  In  short,  The 
Universal  Ether,  in  order  to  do  the  things  at- 
tributed to  it,  must  be  more  solid  than  Solids ; 
more  Vapor-like  and  Gas-like  than  Vapor  or 
Gas ;  more  fluid  than  Fluids ;  infinitely  less  rigid 
than  steel,  and  yet  infinitely  stronger  than  the 
strongest  steel.  It  must  be  a  substance  having 
the  qualities  of  a  vacuum.  It  must  be  contin- 
uous and  not  composed  of  Particles,  Atoms  or 
Molecules.    It   must  be   an   *  ^everything"   in 

104 


THE  PARADOX  OF  SCIENCE 

some  respects,  and  yet  a  ** nothing''  in  others. 
It  must  not  be  Substance,  and  yet  it  must  carry 
Substance  within  its  ocean  of  dimensions,  and, 
besides,  interpenetrate  the  most  minute  space 
between  the  particles  of  Substance.  It  must 
not  be  Energy  or  Force,  and  yet  Science  has 
been  considering  Energy  and  Force  as  but  *  in- 
terruptions of  rest''  or  '* agitations"  within, 
and  of,  itself. 

So  you  see  that  this  mysterious,  wonderful 
Universal  Ether — ^in  order  to  *^be"  at  all — 
must  be  a  ** Something"  possessing  certain 
qualities  or  properties  of  Substance — ^many  of 
the  properties  of  qualities  being  exactly  contra- 
dictory and  opposed  to  each  other — and  yet  it 
cannot  be  Substance  as  we  know  it.  It  is  a 
Paradoxical  thing.  It  could  only  belong  to  an- 
other and  an  entirely  different  order  of  exist- 
ence from  that  of  Substance  as  we  know  it.  It 
must  possess  characteristics  and  properties  of 
an  order  as  yet  unknown  to  us  by  name — ^for 
which  the  material  world  contains  no  analogy — 
for  which  Substance  has  no  analogues.  It  must 
be  a  far  more  complex  thing  than  is  even  the 
most  complex  thing  we  call  Matter,  or  that 
which  we  call  Force  or  Energy.  And  yet,  it 
has  been  claimed  that  it  would  explain  both — 
yes,  contain  within  itself  the  possibility  of  both. 

And  yet,  in  face  of  what  has  just  been  said, 

105 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

the  writer  must  confess,  humbly  and  with  a  full 
realization  of  the  enormity  of  the  offence,  that 
he  supposes  advancing  a  theory,  a  little  further 
on  in  this  book  that  will  attempt  to  identify  this 
Something — this  Universal  Ether — with  a 
Something  else  that  we  know,  although  not 
through  the  senses  or  by  means  of  instruments. 
Bear  with  him  kindly,  he  begs  of  you,  while  he 
proceeds  gradually  along  the  path  that  leads  to 
the  theory. 

Scientists  have  compared  Substance  moving 
through  the  Ether  as  a  coarse  seive  moving 
through  water,  the  latter  making  room  for  the 
passage  of  the  seive,  and  then  closing  up  behind 
it.  If  this  be  amended  by  the  idea  that  the 
moving  seive,  while  allowing  the  water  to  pass 
through  it  freely,  still  carries  along  with  it  a 
thin  film  of  water  which  clings  to  the  wires  of 
the  seive  by  adhesion — if  there  be  admitted  this 
** clinging  film''  as  well  as  the  body  of  the  water 
through  which  the  seive  moves — then  the  illus- 
tration answers  quite  well  as  a  crude  illustra- 
tion of  Substance  and  ' '  The  Ether. ' '  This  fact 
is  important  in  view  of  the  theory  that  will  be 
advanced,  further  on  in  this  book.  Prof. 
Lodge,  in  his  interesting  work,  *' Modern  Views 
of  Electricity,"  mentions  a  number  of  experi- 
ments tending  to  prove  the  above  mentioned 

106 


THE  PARADOX  OF  SCIENCE 

fact,  which  is  not  so  generally  known  as  other 
facts  relating  to  the  Ether. 

Until  the  discovery  of  Eadiant  Matter  (bring- 
ing with  it  the  new  theories  of  the  Corpuscle  or 
Electron,  etc.),  brushed  aside  into  the  dust  heap 
many  generally  accepted  scientific  theories  re- 
garding the  nature  of  Substance,  the  favorite 
and  most  popular  theory  was  what  was  known 
as  the  ^*  Vortex-ring"  theory  of  the  Atom.  This 
theory  held  that  the  atoms  of  Substance  were 
but  vortex-rings  of  the  Ether,  having  had  mo- 
tion communicated  to  them  in  some  way,  and 
which  afterwards  acquired  other  motions,  and 
which  finally  become  apparent  to  our  senses  as 
Substance.  In  other  words,  the  Atom  was  sup- 
posed to  a  vortex-ring  of  Ether,  acted  upon  by 
Force,  in  some  unknown  way,  the  character, 
nature  and  properties  of  the  Atom  being  deter- 
mined by  the  shape  and  size  of  the  vortex-ring; 
the  rate  of  motion ;  etc.,  etc. 

The  new  discoveries  of  Science,  however, 
have  set  aside  (at  least  temporarily)  this  *' vor- 
tex-ring'' theory,  and  at  present  Science  seems 
to  find  its  *  latest  thing  in  Substance,''  in  the 
theory  that  Substance — at  the  last — seems  to 
be  the  Corpuscle  or  Electron.  In  other  words, 
after  many  years  of  fancied  security  in  a  set- 
tled theory  regarding  the  nature  of  Substance, 
Science  once  more  finds  itself  compelled  to  take 

107 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

up  the  search  for  the  origin  of  things.  But  the 
theory  of  the  Ether  remains — and  is  likely  to — 
although  the  names  applied  to  it  will  change. 
By  some  it  is  still  believed  that  in  the  Ether,  a 
little  further  removed,  rests  the  origin  of  Sub- 
stance and  that  the  Corpuscle  may  be  the  ^'vor- 
tex-ring'' product,  instead  of  the  Atom. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  Science  has  made  no 
serious  attempt  to  connect  the  phenomenon  of 
Gravitation  or  Attraction  with  the  Ether. 
Gravitation  stands  alone — an  *' outsider'' 
among  the  Forces,  responding  to  none  of  their 
'laws — needing  no  time  in  which  to  travel — 
needing  no  medium  like  the  Ether  in  which  to 
transmit  ** waves" — fearing  no  obstacle  or  in- 
terfering body,  but  passing  right  through  the 
same — different,  different,  different.  And  we 
shall  see  why  this  difference,  when  we  reach  the 
point  where  our  theory  brings  us  to  the  point 
where  we  must  substitute  '  *  something  else ' '  for 
that  Great  Paradoxical  General  Solvent  of 
Modem  Science — the  Ether  of  Aristotle.  We 
shall  reach  the  point  after  a  brief  consideration 
of  Motion,  Force  and  Energy. 


108 


CHAPTER  Vm 

THE  FORCES  OF  NATURH 

np  HE  Substance  filling  the  Universe  is  in  con- 
-^  stant  and  unceasing  Motion.  Motion  is 
evidenced  in  every  physical  and  chemical  proc- 
ess and  change,  and  manifested  in  the  constant 
interchange  of  position  of  the  Particles  of  Sub- 
stance. 

There  is  absolutely  no  rest  in  Nature — every- 
thing is  constantly  changing — moving — and  vi- 
brating. Building-up  processes  are  ever  at 
work  forming  larger  masses  or  bodies  of  the 
Particles — and  tearing-down  processes,  disin- 
tegration and  decomposition  of  Molecules  and 
Atoms,  and  Corpuscles,  are  constantly  at  work 
also.  Nature  maintains  a  constant  balance 
among  her  Forces.  If  the  building-up  energies 
and  forces  were  allowed  full  sway,  then  all  the 
Particles  in  the  Universe  ultimately  would 
gravitate  to  a  common  centre,  thus  forming  a 
compact  and  solid  Mass,  which  would  thus  dwell 
for  Eternity,  unless  the  Creative  Power  should 
move  upon  it  and  again  scatter  its  Particles  in 

109 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

all  directions.  And,  if  the  tearing-down,  and 
dispersive  forces  and  energies  were  allowed 
full  sway,  the  Particles  would  fly  apart  and 
would  remain  asunder  for  Eternity,  unless 
called  together  by  some  new  Creative  fiat. 

But  Nature  pits  one  force  against  another, 
maintaining  an  equilibrium.  The  result  is  con- 
stant play  and  inter-play  of  forces,  causing  dis- 
tribution, and  redistribution  of  Particles,  fol- 
lowing the  gathering-together  and  building-up 
processes. 

There  is  no  lost  motion,  or  waste  force.  One 
form  of  force  and  motion  is  converted  into  an- 
other, and  so  on,  and  on.  Nothing  is  lost — all 
force  is  conserved,  as  we  shall  see  as  we  pro- 
ceed. 

In  the  public  mind — or  rather,  in  the  mind  of 
that  part  of  the  public  which  think  of  the  matter 
at  all — there  seems  to  be  an  idea  that  *  *  Force '  * 
is  something  of  the  nature  of  an  entity,  separate 
from  Substance  or  Mind — something  that 
pounces  down  upon  Substance  and  drives  it 
along  by  presence  from  without.  The  ancient 
philosophers  regarded  Substance  as  acted  upon 
from  without  by  an  entity  called  Force,  Sub- 
stance being  regarded  as  absolutely  inert  and 
**dead.''  This  idea,  which  is  still  held  by  the 
average  person,  owing,  doubtless,  to  the  sur- 
vival of  old  forms  of  expression,  was  generally 

110 


THE  FORCES  OF  NATURE 

held  by  philosophers  until  the  time  of  Descartes 
and  Newton.  This  old  idea  was  due  to  the 
teachings  of  Aristotle — he  of  the  Ether  Theory 
— and  Science  and  Philosophy  were  timid  about 
shaking  off  the  Aristotelian  dogmas.  Others 
held  that  Light,  Heat  and  Electricity  were 
•* fluids"  conveyed  from  body  to  body — in  fact 
the  general  public  still  entertains  this  idea  re- 
garding Electricity,  owing  to  the  use  of  the  term 
'' the  mectric  fluid/' 

The  present  teaching  of  Science  is  that  Force 
is  the  result  of  the  motion  of  the  Particles  of 
Substance,  and,  of  course,  originates  from 
within,  rather  than  from  without.  It  is  true 
that  Motion  may  be  communicated  to  a  body  by 
means  of  another  body  in  Motion  imparting  the 
same  to  it,  but  that  does  not  alter  the  case,  for 
the  Original  Motion  came  from  the  movement 
and  vibration  of  the  Particles  of  Substance,  al- 
though it  may  have  passed  through  many  stages 
of  transformation,  change  and  transmission  in 
its  progress.  The  only  exception  to  the  rule  is 
Gravitation,  which  is  a  form  of  Force,  the  na- 
ture of  which  is  unknown  to  Science,  although 
its  laws  of  operation,  etc.,  are  understood.  We 
shall  learn  some  new  facts  about  Gravitation 
in  the  forthcoming  chapters  of  this  book. 

It  will  be  well  for  us  to  remember  this  fact,  in 
our  consideration  of  Force  and  Motion — that 

111 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Force  and  Motion  originate  from  the  inherent 
property  of  Motion  passed  by  the  Particles  of 
Substance,  and  come  from  within,  not  from 
without.  This  is  the  best  teaching  of  Modern 
Science,  and  also,  forms  an  important  part  of 
the  Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought  which  is  ad- 
vanced in  this  book.  Buchner,  the  author  of 
** Force  and  Matter/^  vigorously  insists  upon 
this  conception,  saying,  among  many  other  simi- 
lar expressions:  ** Force  may  be  defined  as  a 
condition  of  activity  or  a  motion  of  matter,  or 
of  the  minutest  particles  of  matter  or  a  capacity 
thereof. ' ' 

The  term  ^* Force*'  is  generally  defined  in 
works  on  Physics  as  *^That  which  causes, 
changes  or  terminates  Motion.'*  The  word 
** Force"  is  generally  used  in  the  sense  of  '*in 
action,"  while  ** Energy"  is  usually  used  in  the 
sense  of  '^Potential  Force — capacity  for  per- 
forming work,"  the  idea  being  that  it  is 
*'stored-up"  force,  or  * 'force  awaiting  use." 
The  term  ''Power"  is  used  in  two  senses,  the 
first  meaning  "a  measure  of  Mechanical  En- 
ergy," such  as  a  "forty  horse-power  engine," 
etc.;  the  second  sense  being  "Capacity  or  Abil- 
ity to  Act,  or  exercise  Force,  "this  use  being 
almost  identical  to  the  idea  of  "Energy,"  as 
above  described,  although,  possibly,  a  little 
stronger  expression. 

112 


THE  FOECES  OF  NATURE 

The  Materialistic  school  holds  that  Force  is 
a  property  of  Matter,  the  latter  being  regarded 
as  the  ^^real  thing'*  of  the  Universe.  Others 
hold  that  Force  is  the  **real  thing,*'  and  that 
what  is  called  Matter,  or  Substance,  is  but  a 
centre  of  Force,  etc.  Others  hold  that  the  two 
are  but  aspects  of  the  same  thing,  calling  the 
^* thing"  by  the  name  ** Matter-Force,"  or 
** Force-Matter."  Haeckel  calls  this  combined 
** thing"  by  the  name  of  ** Substance,"  claiming 
that  what  are  called  Matter  and  Force  are  but 
*^ attributes"  of  it,  the  third  *' attribute"  being 
** Sensation,"  which  he  holds  is  akin  to  Mind — 
'^HaeckePs  Substance"  is  held  to  be  Eternal, 
and  Self -existent — its  own  Cause,  in  fact.  (In 
this  book  the  term  *^ Substance"  is  not  used  in 
this  sense,  but  merely  as  synonymous  with  what 
Science  usually  calls  '* Matter.") 

The  views  advanced  in  this  book  differ  mate- 
rially from  any  of  those  above  mentioned,  it 
being  held  by  the  writer  that  '*A11  Force  is 
Vital-Mental  Force,"  and,  consequently, 
^* Force"  as  a  separate  thing  is  considered  an 
unreasonable  proposition — ^what  is  called 
^^ Force"  being  considered  merely  an  action  of 
Mind  upon  Substance,  causing  Motion.  The 
writer  does  not  intend  to  advance  this  idea  at 
this  point  beyond  the  mere  mentioning  of  the 
fact — the  theory  being  brought  out  and  devel- 

113 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

oped  as  we  proceed — and  he  will  proceed  to  a 
consideration  of  the  phenomena  of  Force,  along 
the  lines  of  Modem  Science,  believing  that  in 
this  way  the  subject  may  be  better  understood. 

•The  term  ''Motion,''  as  used  in  Physics,  is 
defined  as:  ''The  act,  process  or  state  of 
changing  place  or  position;  movement'' — 
(Webster).  So  you  see.  Motion  is  the  move- 
ment of  Substance  changing  place  or  position ; 
Force  is  that  which  causes,  changes  or  termi- 
nates Motion;  and  Energy  is  the  "capacity" 
for  manifesting  Force;  and  Power  the  Ability 
to  Act.  In  works  on  Physics  you  will  notice 
the  expression,  "Potential  Energy,"  meaning 
Energy  awaiting  action;  also  "Kinetic  En- 
ergy," meaning  Energy  in  Action;  that  is,  in 
Motion.  We  shall  not  need  these  terms  in  this 
book,  but  it  is  well  to  understand  them. 

Another  term  frequently  met  with,  is  "Con- 
servation of  Energy,"  which  is  used  to  indicate 
that  Law  of  Physics  the  operation  of  which  ren- 
ders Energy  indestructible.  That  is.  Science 
holds  that  Energy  can  not  be  destroyed — that 
it  is  not  lost,  or  created,  but  is  merely  trans- 
formed into  other  forms  of  Energy,  Potential 
or  Kinetic.  Therefore,  after  Energy  is  used,  it 
either  passes  into  a  state  of  Potential  Energy 
or  Rest,  awaiting  a  future  call  to  Activity,  or 
else  is  immediately  transformed  into  another 

114 


THE  FORCES  0^  NATURE 

form  of  Kinetic  Energy,'  or  Energy  in  Action. 
The  theory  holds  that  the  quantity  or  amount 
of  Energy  in  the  Universe  is  fixed  in  its  totality 
— ^none  may  be  created  or  destroyed — there  can 
be  no  addition  to,  or  subtraction  from  the  Total- 
ity of  Energy — that  all  Energy  used  has  been 
previously  stored  up,  or  else  has  been  imme- 
diately transmitted  or  transformed.  It  is  also 
held  that  when  Energy  manifests  as  the  result 
of  work  performed,  it  is  always  found  that  it  is 
at  the  expense  of  some  previously  manifested 
form  of  Energy — that  the  agency  by  which  the 
work  is  performed  always  parts  with  its  stock 
of  Energy,  and  that  the  thing  worked  upon  al- 
ways acquires  or  gains  the  amount  of  Energy 
lost  by  the  aforesaid  agent,  or  worker — and  yet 
there  is  no  actual  loss  or  gain,  but  merely  trans- 
formation. 

The  above  theory  is  mentioned  as  of  inter- 
est in  the  general  subject,  although  it  does  not 
play  a  prominent  part  in  the  subject  of  this 
book,  for  the  writer  holds  that  all  Energy  re- 
sides in  Mind,  and  emerges  therefrom,  and,  in 
the  end,  returns  thereto.  This  being  believed, 
it  is  seen  that  Energy  is  not  to  be  thought  of  as 
a  separate  thing  having  a  ''totality,''  but  mere- 
ly as  a  quality  of  Mind — the  question  of  its 
totality  or  fixed  quantity  not  being  inquired 
into,  although  both,  probably,  run  along  the 

115 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

lines  of  the  nature  of  Mind,  and  depend  upon 
the  limitations,  or  lack  of  limitations,  of  the 
latter.  However,  the  question  does  not  assume 
a  vital  importance  in  our  consideration  of  the 
subject. 

So  far  as  the  question  of  transmission,  or 
transformation  of  Energy,  is  concerned,  how- 
ever, the  principles  of  the  Law  of  Conservation 
of  Energy  may  be  accepted  as  correct,  although 
it  more  properly  belongs  to  the  principle  of 
what  has  been  called  **The  Corelation  of 
Force,''  the  idea  of  which  is  that  one  form  of 
Energy  may  be,  and  is  always,  transformed  into 
another  form,  and  so  on,  and  on,  unto  infinity. 
This  idea  is  followed  in  this  book,  except  that 
the  idea  of  '^From  Mind  originally,  to  Mind 
finally, ' '  is  incorporated  within  it.  This  law  of 
the  ** Corelation  of  Force"  may  be  illustrated 
by  the  following  quotation  from  Tyndall,  the 
great  scientist  of  the  last  century,  who  says : 

**A  river,  in  descending  from  an  elevation  of 
7720  feet,  generates  an  amount  of  heat  com- 
petent to  augment  its  own  temperature  10  de- 
grees F.,  and  this  amount  of  heat  was  ab- 
stracted from  the  sun,  in  order  to  lift  the  matter 
of  the  river  to  the  elevation  from  which  it  falls. 
As  long  as  the  river  continues  on  the  heights, 
whether  in  the  solid  form  as  a  glacier,  or  in  the 
liquid  form  as  a  lake,  the  heat  expended  by  the 

116 


THE  FORCES  OF  NATURE 

sun  in  lifting  it  has  disappeared  from  the  uni- 
verse. It  has  been  consumed  in  the  act  of  lift- 
ing. But,  at  the  moment  that  the  river  starts 
upon  its  downward  course,  and  encounters  the 
resistance  of  its  bed,  the  heat  expanded  in  its 
elevation  begins  to  be  restored.  The  mental 
eye,  indeed,  can  follow  the  emission  from  its 
source  through  the  ether,  as  vibratory  motion, 
to  the  ocean,  where  it  ceases  to  be  vibration, 
and  takes  the  potential  form  among  the  mole- 
cules of  aqueous  vapor;  to  the  mountain-top, 
where  the  heat  absorbed  in  vaporization  is 
given  out  in  condensation,  while  that  expended 
by  the  sun  in  lifting  the  water  to  its  present 
elevation  is  still  unrestored.  This  we  find  paid 
back  to  the  last  unit  by  the  friction  along  the 
river's  bed;  at  the  bottom  of  the  cascade,  where 
the  plunge  of  the  torrent  is  suddenly  arrested; 
in  the  warmth  of  the  machinery  turned  by  the 
river ;  in  the  spark  from  the  millstone ;  beneath 
the  crusher  of  the  miner;  in  the  Alpine  saw- 
mill ;  in  the  milk-churn  of  the  chalet ;  in  the  sup- 
ports of  the  cradle  in  which  the  mountaineer, 
by  water-power,  rocks  his  baby  to  sleep.  All 
the  forms  of  mechanical  motion  here  indicated 
are  simply  the  parcelling  out  of  an  amount  of 
calorific  motion  derived  originally  from  the 
sun ;  and,  at  each  point  at  which  the  mechanical 

117 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

motion  is  destroyed  or  diminished,  it  is  the 
smi's  heat  which  is  restored. '* 

The  following  quotation,  also,  is  interesting 
as  illustrating  another  phase  of  this  law : 

^^The  work  performed  by  men  and  other  ani- 
mals is  due  to  the  transformed  energy  of  food. 
This  food  is  of  vegetable  origin  and  owes  its 
energy  to  the  solar  rays.  The  energy  of  men 
and  animals  is,  therefore,  the  transformed  en- 
ergy of  the  sun.  Excepting  the  energy  of  the 
tides,  the  sim's  rays  are  the  source  of  all  the 
forms  of  energy  practically  available.  It  has 
been  estimated  that  the  heat  received  by  the 
earth  from  the  sun  each  year  would  melt  a  layer 
of  ice  over  the  entire  globe  a  hundred  feet  in 
thickness.  This  represents  energy  equal  to  one 
horse-power  for  each  fifty  square  feet  of  sur- 
^face.*' — Anthony  and  Brackett. 

From  the  above  quotations,  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  principal  and  most  familiar  sources  (or 
great  storage  batteries)  of  Energy,  apparent  to 
dwellers  upon  this  planet,  are  (1)  the  Earth 
manifesting  the  Power  of  Gravitation;  and  (2) 
the  Sun,  manifesting  solar  heat.  In  TyndalPs 
illustration  we  see  the  force  of  the  sun's  Energy 
— ^heat — raising  the  water  from  the  ocean,  by 
evaporation  (although  aided  by  the  earth's 
gravitation  ** pulling  down*'  the  heavier  air,  al- 
lowing the  vapor  to  rise).    Then  we  see  the 

118 


THE  rOBCES  OF  NATURE 

Force  of  Gravitation  causes  the  condensed  va- 
por to  fall  as  rain  or  snow  on  the  mountain-top 
— then  causing  the  rain  to  run  into  little 
streams,  and  so  on  until  the  river  is  reached — 
then  causing  the  river  to  start  on  its  downward 
journey  of  over  seven  thousand  feet — then 
causing  it  to  plunge  over  the  cascade;  to  turn 
the  wheels  that  operated  the  machinery,  and 
turned  the  millstone,  and  the  crusher  of  the 
miner,  and  the  saw-mill,  and  the  milk-churn,  and 
the  cradle.  And,  as  Tyndall  might  have  added, 
had  he  lived  a  little  later — in  the  running  of  the 
dynamo,  which  running,  produced  electricity, 
that  in  turn  caused  lights  to  burn;  other  ma- 
chinery to  run  and  manufacture  things ;  stoves 
to  cook;  flat-irons  to  iron;  automobiles  and  en- 
gines to  run ;  and  many  other  things  along  the 
lines  of  transmitting  Energy,  Force  and  Mo- 
tion. 

And  in  this  consideration,  let  us  not  forget 
the  important  part  that  Gravitation — that  most 
wonderful  of  all  Forces — plays  in  the  grand 
scheme  of  Nature.  Not  only  does  this  Force 
cause  the  planets  to  circle  around  the  sun,  and, 
perhaps  that  sun  around  another  sun,  and  so 
on,  and  on  until  the  matter  becomes  unthink- 
able—not only  this,  but  it  performs  a  million 
parts  in  the  affair  of  earthly  Matter,  as  we  shall 
see  in  a  later  chapter.    The  Force  of  Gravita- 

119 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

tion  is  one  of  the  greatest  mysteries  confronting 
Science  to-day,  although  many  believe  it  a  sim- 
ple question.  Gravitation  and  the  Universal 
Ether  contain  the  great  secrets  of  Nature  that 
Man  is  striving  to  unveil.  And  yet,  so  **  com- 
mon'' is  Gravitation  that  the  race,  including  al- 
most all  the  scientists,  take  it  as  a  ^*  matter  of 
course."  We  shall  devote  much  attention  to 
the  question  of  Gravitation  in  the  forthcoming 
chapters  of  this  book,  for  it  plays  a  very  impor- 
tant part  in  the  general  theory  of  Dynamic 
Thought,  upon  which  this  book  is  based.  We 
shall  have  a  special  chapter  devoted  to  it,  a 
little  later  on,  and  the  matter  will  also  come  up 
for  explanation  further  on  in  the  book. 

But,  in  the  meantime,  let  us  consider  the 
other  forms  of  Energy,  viz.,  Heat,  Light,  Mag- 
netism and  Electricity,  which  with  Gravitation 
and  Attraction  of  other  kinds,  form  the  Forces 
of  Nature. 


120 


CHAPTER  IX 


RADIANT  ENERGY 


'T^HE  '^kinds''  of  Energy  are  very  few,  al- 
■*"  though  the  methods  of  using,  applying  and 
manifesting  same  are  innumerable.  Let  us 
begin  with  one  of  the  best  known  forms  of  En- 
ergy, namely,  Heat. 

Heat  was  formerly  regarded  as  a  very  fine 
fluid  or  substance,  called  *^ caloric,''  which  was 
supposed  to  enter  into  Substance  and  then 
manifest  the  phenomenon  of  *^heat.''  This 
idea  has  long  since  been  relegated  to  the  scrap 
pile  of  Science.  The  present  theory,  which  is 
supported  by  a  mass  of  evidence  obtained 
through  investigation  and  experimentation,  is 
that  Heat  is  a  form  of  Energy,  arising  from  the 
vibratory  motions  of  the  Particles  of  Substance 
— a  **Mode  of  Motion.''  The  degrees  of  Heat 
are  termed  ** Temperature.'  Temperature  de- 
pends upon  the  rate  of  the  heat-vibrations  of 
the  Particles  of  Substance,  either  arising  from 
the  Original  Motion  of  the  Particles,  or  else 
from  vibrations  or  Motion  aroused  in  them  by 

121 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

transmission  from  Particles  of  other  bodies  of 
Substance — these  vibrations  being  "conta- 
gious/' Temperature  then  means  *^the  meas- 
ure of  the  vibrations  of  the  Particles.'' 

All  bodies  of  Substance  have  some  degree  of 
Temperature — some  degree  of  heat-vibration 
of  its  Particles.  Science  has  a  pleasant  "scien- 
tific friction"  of  an  Absolute  Zero  at  the  degree 
of  491  below  Zero,  Fahrenheit,  but  this  is  merely 
an  imaginary  something  with  which  the  grown 
up  children  of  Science  amuse  themselves. 

When  two  bodies  are  brought  near  each  other 
—  the  "nearness"  being  comparative,  and,  in 
some  cases,  meaning  a  distance  of  millions  of 
miles — Heat  is  transmitted  from  the  warmer  to 
the  cooler  body,  until  the  temperatures  are 
equalized — that  is  until  the  two  bodies  vibrate 
in  unison. 

In  Physics  we  are  taught  that  the  "Transmis- 
sion" of  Heat  may  be  accomplished  in  three 
ways,  although  the  writer  is  of  the  opinion  that 
the  three  ways  are  but  three  forms  of  one  way. 
The  first  form  is  called  "Conduction,"  whereby 
the  vibration,  or  Heat,  is  conveyed  along  a  body 
of  Substance,  from  its  warmer  to  its  cooler 
parts — ^f  or  instance,  an  iron  poker  with  one  end 
in  the  fire.  The  second  form  is  called  "Con- 
vection," whereby  the  visible  motion  of  heated 
Substance,  moving  along  the  air — for  instance, 

123 


EADIANT  ENEEGY. 


hot-air,  hot-water,  steam,  etc.,  either  by  means 
of  pipes,  or  by  allowing  them  to  pass  freely 
through  the  air.  The  third  form  is  called 
**Eadiation,''  whereby  the  vibrations  are  be- 
lieved to  be  transformed  into  *Vaves  of  the 
Ether/'  which  will  be  spoken  of  later,  in  ad- 
dition to  what  has  been  said  on  the  subject  in 
our  chapter  entitled  **The  Paradox  of  Science.'* 

The  writer  thinks  that  a  little  consideration 
will  show  us  that  the  same  rule  operates  in  all 
of  the  above  cases,  and  that  ** Conduction''  and 
**  Convection"  are  but  forms  of  Radiation.  For 
instance,  in  Conduction  there  must  be  a  few 
Particles  first  set  into  vibration,  the  same  grad- 
ually passing  on  to  the  others  farther,  and 
farther  away.  Passing  how?  **By  contact," 
replies  Physics.  But,  the  Particles  are  never  in 
absolute  contact — there  always  is  *' plenty  of 
space"  between  them.  And  so  there  must  be 
some  kind  of  *Vaves"  passing  through  the 
space  between  them,  which  space  is  not  filled 
with  *^air,"  or  other  form  of  Substance,  but 
only  with  *Hhe  Ether,"  or  something  that  takes 
its  place.  So  that,  after  all.  Conduction  is  but 
a  form  of  Radiation.  And  the  same  rule  will 
apply  in  the  case  of  Convection. 

Heat  arises  from  several  causes,  all  of  which, 
however,  manifest  through  the  vibration  of  the 
Particles  of  the  body  evidencing  the  Heat.  These 

123 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

causes  may  be  stated  as  (1)  Original  Motion  of 
the  Particles  of  a  body  of  Substance,  arising 
from  some  workings  of  the  Law  of  Attraction, 
and  including  Motion  arising  from  Chemical 
Action,  Combustion,  etc.  (2)  From  transmission 
or  ** contagion''  from  some  other  body  of  Sub- 
stance, the  Particles  of  which  are  vibrating  at 
the  rate  of  Heat.  (3)  From  interrupted  Mo- 
tion, including  friction  both  of  the  moving  body 
with  the  air  or  other  Substance,  and  the  friction 
of  a  current  of  Electricity  passing  through  the 
body.  In  each  of  the  above  cases,  the  actual 
and  immediate  cause  of  the  Heat  is  the  vibration 
of  the  Particles  of  the  Substance  manifesting 
the  Heat,  although  the  transmitted  vibratory 
waves,  or  the  interrupted  motion,  friction,  cur- 
rent, etCv  may  have  been  the  instigator  or  pro- 
voker of  such  vibration.  The  interrupted  mo- 
tion, friction,  or  **wave''  does  not  produce  the 
Heat,  but  merely  arouses  or  provokes  the  in- 
creased vibration  of  the  Particles,  that  really 
manifest  the  Heat.  At  the  last,  remember,  the 
Heat  is  in  the  Particles  of  the  body  that 
**f eels''  or  experiences  it. 

The  vibrations  of  Heat  seem  to  have  the  prop- 
erties of  causing  the  Molecules  to  draw  further 
apart,  and  to  manifest  less  Attraction,  or  more 
Repulsion,  whichever  way  one  cares  to  express 
it.    This  ** moving  away"  of  the  Molecules  tend 

124 


BADIANT  ENERGY. 

to  cause  the  body  to  increase  in  volume  or  size, 
and  occasions  what  is  known  as  ^* Expansion" 
in  Substance.  In  this  way  Heat  transforms 
Solids  into  Liquids ;  Liquids  into  Gases  or  Va- 
pors, the  change  being  wholly  a  matter  of  the 
relative  distances  of  the  Molecules. 

Magnetism  is  another  form  of  Energy,  and  is 
generally  believed  to  be  a  part  of  the  phenomena 
of  Electricity,  if  indeed,  not  a  form  of  Elec- 
tricity itself.  Science  knows  very  little  about 
the  nature  of  Magnetism,  but  in  a  general  way 
holds  to  the  theory  that  it  results  from  the 
vibration  or  motion  of  the  Particles  of  Sub- 
stance, as  do  all  other  forms  of  Energy.  The 
magnetic  qualities  of  a  body  may  be  increased 
or  decreased  by  motion  affecting  the  relation  of 
the  Molecules,  which  fact  has  been  regarded  as 
having  some  bearing  on  the  theory. 

Electricity  is  a  form  of  Energy,  that  Science 
regards  as  also  arising  from  the  vibration  or 
motion  of  the  Particles  of  Substance.  It  is 
transmitted,  like  Heat,  by  Conduction  and  Ead- 
iation,  the  **  waves '*  tending  to  provoke  similar 
vibrations  in  the  Particles  of  Substances  receiv- 
ing them.  By  many  careful  investigators.  Elec- 
tricity is  believed  to  be  very  closely  related  to 
the  phenomenon  called  light,  both  having  much 
in  common.  Science  seems  to  be  discovering 
new  points  of  resemblance  between  them,  and  it 

125 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

is  probable  that  in  the  near  future  they  will  be 
seen  to  be  but  varying  forms  of  the  same  thing. 
The  purposes  of  this  book  do  not  call  for  an 
extended  consideration  of  the  properties  of  Elec- 
tricity, the  same  being  served  by  a  consideration 
of  its  nature  being  akin  to  that  of  the  other 
forms  of  Energy,  namely,  '*  vibration  or  motion 
in  or  among  the  Particles  of  Matter." 

Light  is  a  form  of  Energy,  the  study  of  which 
is  of  the  greatest  interest  to  Science,  for  the 
reason  that  the  field  seems  to  be  widening  out 
continuously,  and  reaching  out  into  the  territory 
formerly  thought  to  be  the  special  region  of 
Electricity.  And,  in  another  direction,  it  seems 
to  be  reaching  out  into  the  territory  of  Heat, 
the  latter  being  considered  by  many  to  be  but 
a  form  of  Light,  in  its  lower  vibrations.  In 
fact,  the  writer  of  this  book  so  considers  the 
subject,  and  for  the  purposes  of  this  book,  in 
later  chapters,  he  will  combine  Electricity,  Heat, 
and  Light,  including,  also,  the  phenomena 
known  as  the  X-Eays,  Becquerel  Rays,  Radium 
waves,  etc.,  as  forms  of  Light — the  combined 
forms  of  Energy  to  be  called  ''Radiant  En- 
ergy,'' In  this  combination,  he  believes  that  he 
is  in  line  with  the  latest  and  best  thought  of 
Modem  Science.  However,  he  does  not  insist 
upon  his  readers  following  this  idea,  and  so,  if 
they  prefer,  they  may  think  of  each  of  these 

126 


RADIANl?  ENEEGY. 

forms  as  separate  and  distinct,  and  yet  not  run 
contrary  to  the  line  of  thought  of  the  book. 

Light  is  not  the  simple  thing  that  it  is  con- 
sidered to  be  by  the  general  public.  It  is  com- 
posed of  many  parts,  qualities  and  manifesta- 
tions. Its  rays,  when  separated  by  the  Spec- 
trum, are  seen  to  consist  of  ** waves''  or  vibra- 
tions of  differing  degrees  of  rate  and  intensity. 
The  lower  range  contains  the  heat  rays,  and  it 
is  interesting  to  know  that  there  are  rays  of 
heat  too  far  down  in  the  scale  to  be  evidenced 
by  human  senses  that  may  be  distinguished  by 
delicate  instruments.  But  there  are  rays  still 
further  down  in  the  scale  thaf  are  known  to  ex- 
ist, theoretically,  that  cannot  be  registered  even 
by  the  finest  instruments.  To  gain  an  idea  of 
the  delicacy  of  these  instruments,  let  us  remem- 
ber that  Prof.  Langley  has  an  instrument  called 
the  ** Bolometer,''  that  is  so  delicate  that  it  reg- 
isters a  change  of  temperature  of  one  millionth 
of  a  degree,  and  will  register  the  heat  of  a  can- 
dle one  and  one-half  miles  distant  from  it. 
Light  vibrations  arise  from  combustion,  fric- 
tion electricity  etc.,  causing  the  Particles  to  as- 
sume increased  Motion. 

Let  us  consider  the  report  of  the  Spectrum. 
Beginning  with  waves  or  vibrations  far  below 
the  sensibility  of  Man,  the  scale  shows  an  ad- 
vance until  the  first  **warm"  vibration  of  iron 

127 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

was  reached.  This  first  indication  of  warmth 
comes  when  the  vibrations  reach  the  rate  of 
35,000,000,000,000  per  second.  Then  gradually 
they  increase  until  a  dull  red  glow  is  noticed — 
the  lowest  visible  light  ray — when  the  vibra- 
tions are  450,000,000,000,000  per  second.  Then 
come  the  orange  rays,  then  the  golden  yellow, 
then  the  pure  yellow,  then  the  greenish  yellow, 
then  the  pure  green,  then  the  greenish  blue,  then 
the  ocean  blue,  then  the  cyanic  blue,  then  the 
indigo,  then  the  violet — the  latter  evidencing 
when  the  vibrations  reach  the  rate  of  750,000,- 
000,000,000  per  second.  Then  come  the  Ultra- 
violet rays — invisible  to  human  sight — ^but  evi- 
denced by  chemical  media.  In  this  Ultra-violet 
region  lies  the  X-Eays,  etc.,  and  also  the 
**  Actinic  Eays,"  that  produce  photographs, 
sunburn  one's  face  and  blister  the  nose — that 
cause  violent  explosions  in  chemicals  —  that 
transform  forms  of  Substance — that  are  em- 
ployed to  cure  skin  diseases,  etc.  These  Ac- 
tinic or  Chemical  Eays  have  an  important  role 
to  play  in  plant-life,  for  they  act  upon  the  green 
leaves  of  the  plant,  causing  a  chemical  change 
by  which  carbonic  acid  and  water  are  trans- 
formed into  sugar  and  starches. 

Some  of  the  rays  of  the  Ultra-violet  region 
of  Light  penetrate  substances  formerly  consid- 
ered solid  and  impenetrable.  And  some  of  them 

128 


RADIANT  ENERGY. 


emitted  from  Eadimn,  etc.,  would  destroy  or- 
ganic life  if  applied  in  sufficient  quantities. 
Some  of  them  are  practically  waves  of  Elec- 
tricity so  that  Light  and  Electricity  are  seen  to 
be  closely  related. 

To  give  one  an  idea  of  the  differences  pro- 
duced by  different  rates  of  vibration,  let  us 
imagine  a  Mass  of  Iron,  shaped  like  a  great 
*^Top,*'  capable  of  being  impelled  to  **spin''  at 
a  constantly  increasing  rate  of  speed,  by  some 
Mighty  Will.  At  first  it  is  seen  as  a  slowly 
spinning  Top,  manifesting  nothing  but  slow  mo- 
tion, to  our  senses. 

Now,  imagine  our  Top  spinning  at  a  rate 
doubling  each  second  The  first  second  the  Top 
spins  at  the  rate  of  :evolutions  per  second. 
We  notice  no  change,  except  that  we  can  see  the 
movement.  The  next  second  the  revolutions 
are  doubled  to  four  per  second.  Then,  doubling 
each  second,  we  have,  respectively,  revolutions 
of  eight  per  second,  then  sixteen,  and  then  in 
the  fifth  second  thirty-two  per  second.  Then  we 
begin  to  notice  a  change. 

When  the  revolutions  reach  thirty-two  per 
second  the  friction  of  the  moving  Top  on  the 
air  causes  it  to  give  forth  a  very  low,  deep,  bass 
note  of  sound.  This  note  is  like  a  low,  deep 
**hum,''  and  is  the  lowest  possible  of  percep- 
tion by  the  human  hearing,  although  it  is  pos- 

129 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

sible  that  some  of  the  lower  forms  of  life  may 
be  conscious  of  still  lower  vibrations. 

The  sixth  second  the  revolutions  reach  sixty- 
four,  and  the  low  note  has  grown  much  higher 
in  the  scale.  The  seventh  second  records  a  rate 
of  128,  and  the  note  has  correspondingly  in- 
creased. Then,  as  the  seconds  pass,  we  have, 
successively,  256,  512,  1,024,  2,048,  4,096,  8,192, 
16,384,  32,768,  the  latter  in  the  fifteenth  second, 
and  representing  the  highest  note  recognizable 
by  the  human  ear,  although  it  is  believed  that 
some  of  the  lower  animals  may  recognize  sounds 
too  acute  for  our  sense  of  hearing.  During  this 
increase  in  revolutions  from  the  fifth  second  to 
the  fifteenth,  the  sound-note  has  risen  rapidly 
in  the  scale  from  the  low  sullen  **hum,'*  on 
through  the  notes  of  the  musical  scale,  and  be- 
yond the  range  of  instruments,  until  the  shrill- 
ness becomes  so  intense  as  to  be  almost  unbear- 
able, and  finally  terminating  in  a  shrill,  piercing 
shriek  like  the  *' squeak'*  of  the  bat,  only  long- 
drawn  out. 

Then  from  the  termination  of  the  sound  (by 
reason  of  the  rate  of  vibration  having  become 
too  high)  silence  reigns  for  thirty  seconds — ab- 
solute silence,  in  spite  of  the  rapidly  increasing 
rate  of  vibrations,  in  fact,  because  of  it. 

When  the  forty-fifth  second  is  reached,  and 
the  revolutions  have  reached  the  rate  of  35,184,- 

130 


RADIANT  ENERGY. 

372,088,832  per  second,  our  Top  begins  to  emit 
heat-rays,  increasing  each  second.  Then  a  lit- 
tle later  a  dull,  dim  glow  may  be  noticed.  Then, 
as  the  seconds  fly,  the  dull  glow  manifests  a 
deep  dark  red  color,  such  as  one  notices  in  the 
iron  of  the  blacksmith's  shop,  soon  after  it 
begins  to  **glow.''  Then,  on  and  on,  as  the 
seconds  fly,  the  deep  red  grows  lighter  and 
brighter,  gradually  changing  into  orange,  then 
into  yellow,  then  into  green,  then  into  blue,  then 
into  indigo,  then  into  violet,  and  then  into  the 
color  of  **white-heaf  Then  this  '*  white- 
heat"  changes  into  a  still  more  dazzling  white, 
and  then  a  white  impossible  to  describe  ap- 
pears, so  bright,  clear  and  brilliant  that  the  eye 
cannot  bear  the  sight.  Then,  suddenly,  the  in- 
tense brightness  is  succeeded  by  absolute  dark- 
ness, and  the  moving  Top  cannot  be  seen  by  the 
eye — and  yet  it  moves  on.  The  highest  rec- 
orded chemical  rays  of  light  are  estimated  to 
equal  a  rate  of  vibration  of  1,875,000,000,000,000 
per  second.  The  vibration  of  the  lowest  shade 
of  red  light  is  estimated  at  450,000,000,000,000, 
and  the  highest  of  violet  at  750,000,000,000,000 
per  second,  so  we  may  imagine  what  the  highest 
line  on  the  spectrum  is  like. 

Still  vibrating,  our  Top,  which  has  become 
now  a  Mass  of  Vaporized  Iron,  rapidly  tending 
toward  still  more  ethereal  forms.   It  has  passed 

131 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

out  from  the  region  of  light-waves,  into  another 
^^  Unknown  Eegion'*  of  Vibrations,  in  which 
region,  however,  exist  the  vibrations  known  to 
ns  as  the  **X-Rays,"  etc.  It  is  throwing  off 
great  quantities  of  Electrons.  If  we  were  to 
use  a  fluorescent  screen  we  would  be  able  to  ob- 
serve the  phenomena  of  the  Roentgen  Rays,  and 
similar  manifestations  of  Radiant  Energy. 

On  and  on  vibrates  the  Top  of  what  we  once 
called  Iron — cold  iron,  warm  iron,  hot  iron, 
melted  iron,  gaseous  iron,  etherealized  iron,  if 
you  like.  What  it  is  like  now,  the  imagination 
of  Man  cannot  conceive.  Still  the  revolutions 
continue,  doubling  each  second.  What  is  being 
produced^  The  imagination  cannot  conceive 
of  what  this  state  of  Substance,  now  being 
reached,  is  like.  By  a  scientific  form  of  poetry 
we  might  think  of  it  as  melting  into  Energy — 
pure  Energy,  if  there  were  such  a  thing.  Long 
since  it  has  been  resolved  into  its  original  Par- 
ticles— its  Corpuscles,  and  perhaps  into  the 
*^ stuff''  from  which  particles  are  made.  But 
we  must  let  the  curtain  drop — the  wildest  fancy 
cannot  follow  the  Dance  of  Substance  any  fur- 
ther. 

The  theory  of  the  transmission  of  vibrations 
of  Radiant  Energy  by  means  of  '* waves"  in 
the  Ether,  or  *' something  that  takes  the  place 
of  the  Ether,''  has  been  mentioned  in  other 

132 


RADIANT  ENERGY. 

parts  of  the  book.  Keferring  again  to  it,  the 
writer  would  say  that  he  thinks  it  probable  that 
the  *  Vaves*'  coming  in  contact  with  the  count- 
less Corpuscles  in  the  Earth's  atmosphere,  com- 
municate a  high  rate  of  motion  to  them,  the 
result  being  that  they  take  on  the  vibrations  im- 
mediately, and  pass  along  with  the  *^wave'' 
current — the  result  being  that  much  that  we 
consider  as  waves  of  Light,  Heat  and  Elec- 
tricity are  but  streams  of  these  Corpuscles  in 
which  vibrations  have  been  awakened  by  the 
** waves.''  This  idea  will  help  to  explain  some 
of  the  phenomena  of  Light,  which  seemed  more 
understandable  under  the  old  Light-Corpuscle 
theory  of  Newton  than  under  the  ^^wave"  the- 
ory of  recent  years.  The  idea  is  advanced 
merely  for  the  purpose  of  setting  down  the 
thought,  for  it  plays  no  important  part  in  the 
theory  of  the  book. 

Another  matter  that  should  not  be  overlooked 
in  connection  with  Light  and  Heat  and  Elec- 
tricity is  that  Particles  absorb  or  '* catch"  the 
vibrations  in  different  degrees,  their  receptivity 
depending  upon  their  particular  vibratory 
mode,  or  ''custom  of  their  kind.'*  If  unable  to 
''absorb"  the  vibrations,  they  "reflect"  them. 
Substance,  of  any  particular  kind,  absorb  Heat 
in  the  degree  of  its  atomic  weight. 

In  the  next  chapter  we  shall  learn  something 
133 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

of  The  Law  of  Attraction,  that  wonderful  Law 
that  makes  possible  any  Motion  or  Radiant  En- 
ergy. 


134 


CHAPTER  X 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTRACTION 


TN  the  previous  chapters  we  have  seen  that 
•*-  all  forms  of  Radiant  Energy,  viz.,  Light, 
Heat,  Electricity  and  Magnetism,  arose  from 
the  Motion  of  the  Particles  of  Substance.  It 
now  becomes  important  to  learn  just  what  cause 
this  ** Motions  of  the  Particles/'  Science  is 
somewhat  hazy  and  foggy  on  this  subject,  but 
in  a  general  way  decides  that  it  is  caused  by 
*'the  mutual  relations  and  positions  of  the  par- 
ticles, arising  from  their  respective  attractive 
qualities,''  as  a  recent  writer  has  expressed  it. 
Well,  this  is  better  than  the  old  way  of  seeking 
refuge  and  retreat  in  a  mere  volume  of  dense 
words.  It  is  indeed  the  only  logical  conclusion, 
this  one  that  the  operations  of  the  Law  of  At- 
traction are  manifested  in  the  Motion  of  the 
Particles. 

This  great  Law  of  Attraction  is  the  greatest 
Law  in  Nature.  It  operates  on  all  planes  of 
life.  It  is  always  in  evidence.  Let  us  con- 
sider it. 

Let  us  begin  by  considering  the  most  mag- 
135 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

nificent  and  constant  exhibition  of  that  Law — 
Gravitation.  Gravitation  is  the  Eiddle  of  the 
Universe,  and  the  one  form  of  Energy  that 
balks  Science — so  much  a  mystery  that  Science 
does  not  even  hazard  a  *' guess''  at  its  nature — 
no  theory  of  the  origin  and  nature  of  Gravita- 
tion is  to  be  found  in  *^the  books.''  Let  us  see 
what  Gravitation  is. 

It  is  more  than  the  power  that  *  Epulis  things 
to  the  earth,"  as  the  average  man  would  define 
it.  It  does  more  than  cause  water  to  run  down 
hill,  and  turn  mill-wheels  to  drive  machinery. 
Water-power  results  from  Gravitation,  but 
even  the  Energy  of  Niagara  Falls  is  insig- 
nificant when  compared  to  the  other  manifesta- 
tions of  the  Mother  of  Energy — Gravitation. 

Webster  defines  Gravitation  as:  **That  at- 
traction or  force  by  which  all  bodies  or  particles 
in  the  universe  tend  toward  each  other." 

Following  that  definition,  let  us  add  that: 
Every  particle  of  Substance  has  an  attraction 
for  every  other  particle. 

In  view  of  our  belief  that  this  ^^ attraction" 
is  a  form  of  mental  effort,  let  us  regard  the 
term  **  Attraction"  as  being  a  form  of  what  we 
call  ** Desire,"  or  even  **Love,"  in  the  mental 
world.  If  you  will  think  of  it  in  this  way,  you 
will  be  better  able  to  fall  in  with  our  lines  of 
thought. 

136 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTRACTION 

And,  in  addition  to  every  particle  of  Sub- 
stance having  an  attraction  (love  or  desire)  for 
every  other  particle,  it  has  the  means  and  power 
to  draw  that  other  particle  toward  itself,  and 
to  move  toward  that  other  particle  at  the  same 
time.  Webster  gives  a  very  clear  idea  of  this 
when  he  defines  Attraction  as:  ''An  invisible 
power  in  a  body  by  which  it  draws  anything  to 
itself;  the  power  in  nature  acting  mutually  be- 
tween bodies,  or  ultimate  particles,  tending  to 
draw  them  together,  or  to  produce  their  cohe- 
sion  or  combination,  and  conversely  resisting 
separations^ 

The  majority  of  persons,  when  thinking  of 
*' Gravitation,'*  are  satisfied  with  the  idea  that 
it  is  a  power  that  *' pulls  things  down  to  the 
ground,*'  and  do  not  think  of  it  as  a  force  that 
*  Epulis  things'*  other  ways  besides  **down," 
and  which  is  possessed  and  exercised  by  the 
speck  of  dust  as  well  as  by  the  whole  earth — ^by 
the  molecule  as  well  as  by  the  mass.  The  rea- 
son of  this  is  that  this  power  is  so  slight  in 
small  bodies  of  Substance  that  it  is  unnoticed; 
and  that  only  when  the  mass  is  sufficiently  large 
to  make  the  *^pull"  strong  does  one  perceive 
and  appreciate  that  the  force  exists.  The  lack 
of  information  on  the  part  of  the  average  per- 
son regarding  this  subject  is  amazing,  particu- 
lar 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

larly  when  the  importance  of  the  knowledge  is 
understood. 

The  attraction  that  holds  the  molecules  of 
Substance  together  is  Gravitation.  The  at- 
traction that  *^ pulls'*  a  piece  of  Substance  to 
the  earth  is  Gravitation.  The  attraction  that 
keeps  the  suns  and  planets  in  their  orbits  is 
Gravitation.  Let  us  see  the  operations  of  the 
Law. 

In  Astronomy  you  may  learn  that  the  move- 
ments of  the  planets  around  the  sun  and  the 
moons  around  their  planets — their  regular  and 
constant  relative  positions — are  caused  by  the 
force  of  Gravitation.  If  it  were  not  for  this 
attraction  by  the  Sun,  the  planets  would  fly  out 
into  space,  like  a  stone  from  a  sling.  The  At- 
traction of  Gravitation  acts  on  the  planets  just 
as  does  the  string  of  the  whirling  sling  that 
keeps  the  stone  from  flying  away  during  the 
whirling  until  the  string  is  released.  Some 
astronomers  think  that  our  sun  revolves  around 
some  greater  sun,  and  this  again  around  a 
greater,  and  so  on  to  infinity.  If  this  be  so, 
then  the  Attraction  of  Gravitation  is  that  which 
holds  them  all  in  their  orbits  and  places  in  spite 
of  their  motion. 

And  in  Physics,  you  may  learn  that  this  same 
Attraction  of  Gravitation  prevents  the  people 
and  objects  on  the  surface  of  the  earth  from 

138 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTRACTION 


flying  off  into  space.  And  that  it  holds  the 
portions  of  the  earth  together,  preventing  them 
from  flying  apart. 

And,  remember  this,  for  it  is  important — the 
Attraction  of  the  Earth,  great  and  powerful  as 
it  is,  is  nothing  more  than  the  combined  at- 
tractive power  of  its  constituent  molecules,  or 
atoms,  or  parts.  The  centre  of  the  Earth  is 
the  Centre  of  the  Attraction,  because  it  is  the 
centre  of  the  aggregation  of  its  Particles. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  the  Earth  sim- 
ply attracts  **  downward,  *'  that  is,  toward  its 
centre.  On  the  contrary,  large  masses  of  earth 
— ^large  mountains,  for  instance — exert  a  cer- 
tain degree  of  Attraction  of  Gravitation,  and 
experiments  have  shown  that  a  *' plumb"  is 
slightly  deflected  by  reason  of  the  proximity  of 
a  large  mountain.  And  the  reason  that  bodies 
**lose  weight''  as  they  descend  from  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth  is  because  they  leave  ** above'' 
them  a  certain  large  portion  of  the  molecules 
composing  the  earth,  which  mass  of  molecules 
exert  an  attraction  proportionate  to  their  mass, 
which  attraction  balances  the  attraction  of  the 
mass  of  earth  *  ^  beneath  them. ' ' 

Science  teaches  that  if  the  earth  were  hollow 
in  the  centre,  the  weight  there  would  be  Zero, 
or  nothing  at  all,  and  that  a  body  would  float  in 
the  space  at  the  centre  of  the  earth  just  as  does 

139 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

a  balloon  in  the  air,  the  reason  thereof  being 
that  the  attraction  would  be  equalized — equal 
attraction  from  every  direction,  counterbal- 
ancing each  other.  Considering  the  earth's 
radius  to  be  4000  miles,  a  body  that  weighed 
100  pounds  on  the  surface  would  weigh  but  75 
pounds  at  the  depth  of  1000  miles;  but  50 
pounds  at  a  depth  of  2000  miles ;  but  25  pounds 
at  a  depth  of  3000  miles ;  and  Nothing,  or  Zero, 
at  a  depth  of  4000  miles,  which  would  be  the 
Centre  of  the  Earth.  This,  of  course,  supposes 
that  the  Substance  of  which  the  earth  is  com- 
posed is  of  uniform  density  from  surface  to 
centre. 

From  an  equal  distance  above  the  surface  of 
the  earth,  bodies  released,  or  dropped,  will 
reach  the  surface  at  exactly  the  same  degree  of 
speed,  and  in  exactly  the  same  time — this  irre- 
spective of  weight  or  size.  In  other  words,  a 
cork  or  piece  of  lead,  no  matter  what  their  sizes 
may  be,  will  travel  with  equal  rapidity.  In 
case  where  the  *' lighter*'  substance  travels 
more  slowly  (compare  a  feather  and  bullet,  for 
instance)  the  difference  is  caused  by  the  light 
object  meeting  with  more  resistance  from  the 
air.  This  apparent  exception  has  been  ex- 
plained away  by  the  experiment  of  dropping 
the  bullet  and  the  feather  in  a  vacuum  tube,  in 
which  there  was  no  resistance  from  air,  the  con- 

140 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTEACTION 


sequence  being  that  both  descended  precisely 
at  the  same  instant.  Another  similar  experi- 
ment is  to  place  the  feather  upon  a  piece  of 
iron  whereby  the  resistance  of  the  air  is  pre- 
vented, and  the  feather  will  maintain  its  posi- 
tion during  the  drop,  and  will  reach  the  ground 
resting  on  top  of  the  iron,  just  as  it  started. 

And,  remember  this  please,  that  the  small  ob- 
ject attracted  by  the  earth  exerts  an  attraction 
on  its  own  account.  If  the  two  were  of  the 
same  size  they  would  exert  an  equal  attracting 
power,  but  as  one  is  smaller  its  attracting  power 
is  very  slight  compared  with  that  of  the  large 
mass.  But  it  is  true  that  the  particle  of  dust 
attracts  the  earth  precisely  as  the  earth  attracts 
the  particle  of  dust — the  difference  being  solely 
a  matter  of  degree  depending  upon  the  *'mass" 
of  the  body.  The  amount  or  degree  of  the  com- 
hined  attracting  power  is  determined  by  the 
combined  total  of  the  two  masses.  Distance 
lessens  the  degree  of  attraction — thus  as  bodies 
are  lifted  above  the  earth  the  weight  decreases 
very  gradually,  and  by  very  slight  degrees,  but 
constantly  and  invariably.  The  poles  of  the 
earth  are  flattened,  and,  consequently,  the 
weight  of  an  object  slightly  increases  as  it  is 
carried  from  equator  to  pole. 

Concluding  our  consideration  of  Gravitation, 
it  will  be  well  to  call  your  attention  to  the  fact 

141 


t)YNAMIC  THOUGHT 

that  Gravitation  differs  from  the  forms  of  Ra- 
diant Energy  known  as  Heat,  Light,  Electricity 
and  Magnetism  in  several  very  important  par- 
ticulars, which  seems  to  go  far  in  the  direction 
of  proof  that  the  latter  are  by  incidents  or  con- 
sequences of  the  former. 

In  the  first  place,  Gravitation,  so  far  as  is 
known,  is  not  dependent  upon,  caused  by,  or 
maintained  by,  any  other  Force  or  form  of  En- 
ergy. Nor  does  it  seem  to  be  derived  from 
some  great  reservoir,  from  which  it  obtains  its 
supply  of  Energy.  On  the  contrary,  it  seems  to 
be  a  **thing-in-itself,''  self-supporting,  self- 
existing — an  intrinsic  thing,  in  fact.  It  does 
not  seem  to  be  lost  to  bodies  by  radiation.  And 
consequently  there  seems  to  be  no  need  of  a 
body  replenishing  its  supply,  as  there  is  no  loss. 
Gravitation  seems  to  be  a  constant  something, 
remaining  always  with  bodies  and  neither  being 
lost  or  acquired.  It  exists  between  the  Atoms, 
Molecules,  Masses — all  in  the  same  way.  In 
fact,  one  is  tempted  to  think  of  the  planets  and 
worlds  in  space,  as  Molecules  of  some  greater 
Mass  held  together  by  Gravitation  just  as  are 
the  Molecules  held  together.  Remember,  that 
the  Molecules  and  Atoms  are  not  in  absolute 
contact,  but  there  is  always  a  '* space''  between 
them,  although  the  space  or  distance  may  be 
'Unsensible'*  to  us.    **As  above,  so  below,'' 

142 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTRACTION 

says  the  old  occult  aphorism,  and  it  seems  to 
be  so. 

Then  again,  Gravitation  is  believed  to  act 
instantuneously,  and  does  not  require  Time  to 
pass  between  bodies,  as  does  Light,  Heat,  Elec- 
tricity, Magnetism — Eadiant  Energy.  Light 
travels  through  the  Ether  (as  light-waves)  at 
the  rate  of  184,000  miles  a  second.  The  same 
is  true  of  Heat  and  of  Electricity.  But  Gravi- 
tation travels  instantaneously.  For  instance, 
if  a  new  star  were  to  spring  into  existence  at 
some  inconceivable  distance  from  the  earth  it 
would  require  thousands  of  years  for  its  light 
to  reach  us.  But  its  Attraction  of  Gravitation 
would  be  felt  instantly.  Do  you  realize  what 
this  means?  It  means  that  Gravitation  is  in 
some  way  connected  with  the  Ether,  or  ^'con- 
veying medium, '*  that  an  impulse  communi- 
cated at  some  point  of  space  trillions  of  miles 
away  is  felt  at  once  at  our  point  in  space,  and 
vice  versa.  There  is  some  awful  mystery  here, 
and  the  laws  of  Substance,  and  Force,  as  gen- 
erally understood,  do  not  account  for  it.  And 
the  theories  regarding  the  Ether  do  not  throw 
light  upon  it.    But  wait  a  hit! 

But  more  than  this.  Science  holds  that 
Gravitation  does  not  require  a  medium — that  it 
seems  to  be  its  own  medium — ^needing  no 
*' Ether''  or  other  medium  to  transmit  its  in- 

143 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

fluence.  In  this  respect  also,  Gravitation  dif- 
fers from  the  form  of  Eadiant  Energy.  And 
more,  it  is  not  **  cut-off  or  interfered  with  by 
any  intervening  body,  for  its  force  operates 
through  such  intervening  bodies.  For  instance, 
in  an  eclipse  of  the  Sun,  the  Moon  passes  be- 
tween the  Earth  and  the  Sun,  but  the  Gravita- 
tion is  not  affected  in  the  slightest,  for  the 
bodies  would  evidence  such  change  immediately 
were  it  to  occur. 

So  Gravitation  acts  instantaneously;  is  its 
own  medium,  and  may  not  be  interfered  with  by 
an  intervening  body.  It,  indeed,  is  in  a  differ- 
ent ^* class''  from  Light,  Heat  and  Electricity. 

And  now  let  us  consider  the  other  forms  of 
Attraction. 

In  the  previous  chapters  we  saw  that  the 
form  of  Attraction  called  ** Cohesion''  caused 
the  molecules  to  tend  to  each  other,  and  to  re- 
main in  more  or  less  close  contact,  the  differing 
degrees  of  Cohesion  determining  the  Density, 
etc.,  of  the  body.  Were  the  Attractive  force  of 
Cohesion  suddenly  removed,  the  most  solid 
bodies,  as  well  as  the  lightest  ones,  would  in- 
stantly fly  into  very  fine  powder,  thus  being 
resolved  into  their  constituent  molecules.  The 
separation  of  the  Molecules,  that  is,  the  ''set- 
ting further  apart,"  occasioned  by  Heat,  is 
spoken  of  by  Physicists  as  ''Eepulsion."    But 

144 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTRACTION 


the  writer  holds  that  repulsion  is  an  entirely 
different  thing,  and  that  the  heat  merely  causes 
the  Molecules  to  lose  a  portion  of  their  Attrac- 
tive power  for  each  other.  Until  the  heat  being 
withdrawn,  the  Molecules  respond  to  the  unin- 
terrupted Attraction.  The  Molecules  are  like 
lovers  who  are  attracted  toward  each  other, 
and  remain  attached  unless  separated  violently, 
or  by  some  fading  of  Attraction.  Consider 
Heat  as  a  disturbing  element — a  '^misunder- 
standing'' between  the  molecular  lovers,  who 
under  its  influence  draw  somewhat  apart,  and 
are  only  reunited  when  the  obstacle  is  removed, 
and  harmony  again  manifested. 

As  we  have  shown  you  in  a  previous  chapter, 
the  so-called  '* properties''  of  Matter,  i.  e.. 
Hardness,  Tenacity,  Malleability,  Ductility, 
etc.,  are  simply  evidence  of  a  persistent  Cohe- 
siveness  of  the  Molecules — a  strong  '*love"  or 
** desire"  for  each  other  that  caused  them  to 
adopt  every  possible  means  in  their  power  to 
resist,  and  prevent,  the  separation  of  the  Mole- 
cules forming  the  mass.  It  was  like  a  des- 
perate attempt  to  prevent  the  *' breaking  up  of 
the  family. ' ' 

Each  so-called  Special  Physical  Property  of 
Matter  is  seen  to  be  but  the  action  of  the  Mole- 
cule resisting  separation,  in  obedience  to  that 
law  of  its  being  called  '*  Attraction,"  or  *'Gravi- 

145 


t)YNAMIC  THOUGHT 

tation,'*  or  ^^ Cohesion,'*  or  *' Adhesion'' — ^but 
which  might  as  fitly  be  called  *^ Desire,"  or 
**Love."  And,  remember,  that  this  law  does 
not  seem  to  be  merely  one  of  self-preservation 
of  the  Molecule — for  it  remains  intact  even 
after  the  separation  from  its  companions  or 
family.  It  is  more,  for  it  is  a  law  that  causes 
it  to  bend  all  its  energies  in  remaining  within 
*' molecular  distance"  or  close  companionship 
with  its  family,  and  resisting  disintegration.  It 
is  like  the  '^social  instinct"  in  Man,  if  one  may 
be  pardoned  from  using  the  figure. 

Now  for  the  Attraction  of  the  Atoms — 
'* Chemical  Affinity,"  or  **Chemism,"  as  it  is 
called.  An  Atom,  you  know,  is  the  chemical 
unit  of  Matter,  and  the  smallest  particle  of 
Matter  that  can  enter  into  combination  (leav- 
ing the  Corpuscle  out  of  the  consideration,  for 
the  moment).  These  Atoms  exhibit  and  mani- 
fest an  Attraction  for  each  other  that  causes 
them  to  form  combinations  or  *' marriages," 
and  thus  to  combine,  forming  a  molecule.  But 
remember,  always,  that  when  Atoms  ''combine" 
they  do  not  merge  their  identities — they  simply 
''marry,"  and  nothing  more.  Each  atom 
maintains  its  own  identity,  and  is  found  intact 
if  the  "marriage"  is  destroyed  by  chemical 
process,  which  might  be  called  the  termination 
of  the    molecular     marriage,     by  "divorce," 

146 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTEACTION 

that  is,  by  one  Atom  forsaking  its  mate  and 
seeking  a  new  ^^aflSinity''  in  the  shape  of  some 
more  attractive  (or  attracting)  Atom.  For, 
alas,  the  Atoms  are  more  or  less  fickle,  and 
often  leave  their  life-partners  for  some  other 
fascinating  Particle.  At  times  there  is  mani- 
fested a  condition  of  *'how  happy  could  I  be 
with  either,  were  t'other  fair  charmer  away''^ — 
there  is  a  conflict  of  attractions. 

There  is  more  *^ flirting''  and  ** affairs  of  the 
heart"  in  the  world  of  Atoms  than  in  the  region 
of  the  Molecules,  for  while  the  latter  are  apt  to 
seek  only  the  companionship  of  their  own 
**family,"  or  some  nearly  related  family,  the 
Atoms  have  quite  a  number  of  possible  ^^aflSni- 
ties,"  and  will  invariably  desert  a  lesser  attrac- 
tion for  a  greater  one  (thus  forming  a  new 
molecule)  and  leave  the  deserted  one  to  get 
along  alone  as  best  it  may,  or  else  form  a  new 
alliance  with  some  other  aflSnity  who  is  either 
impervious  to  the  attraction  of  the  more  bril- 
liant charmer,  or  else  is  out  of  the  danger  of 
temptation. 

But,  if  we  analyze  and  carefully  consider  this 
*' Chemical  Affinity,"  **Chemism,"  we  will  see 
that  it  comes  well  under  the  definition  of  **  At- 
traction" as  given  by  Webster,  and  quoted  in 
the  first  part  of  this  chapter.  It  certainly  comes 
under  the  rule  of  "the  power  in  nature  acting 

147 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

mutually  between  bodies,  or  ultimate  particles, 
tending  to  draw  them  together/'  etc. 

The  writer  thinks  that  he  is  justified  in  ask- 
ing you  to  consider  Gravitation,  Cohesion,  Ad- 
hesion and  Chemical  Affinity  as  related  forms 
of  the  same  thing.  If  you  do  not  like  to  call 
this  *^same  thing''  by  the  name  of  *^ Gravita- 
tion,'' suppose  we  call  it  **The  Law  of  Attrac- 
tion," of  which  Gravitation,  Cohesion,  Adhe- 
sion, Chemical  Affinity  or  Chemism  are  but 
different  aspects.  (This  ** relation"  is  de- 
scribed in  Chapter  XIII.) 

And  the  writer  believes  that  this  **Law  of 
Attraction"  is  the  underlying  cause  of  all  that 
we  call  Energy,  Force,  Power,  Motion,  etc.,  in 
the  Physical  world.  For  if  ^^Gravitation"  ac- 
counts for  all  '^Mass  Motion,"  or  ** Mechanical 
Motion" — if  Molecular  Cohesion,  and  the  vi- 
brations accompanying  it,  manifest  in  forms  of 
*' Molecular  Motion" — and  if  Atomic  ** Chem- 
ical Affinity"  or  ** Chemism,"  manifest  in 
** Atomic  Motion" — and  if  even  the  Corpuscles 
in  their  movements  obey  this  same  ^*Law  of  At- 
traction" in  some  form — and  if  all  Force  and 
Energy  is  but  a  '^Mode  of  Motion" — then,  if 
all  this  be  true,  are  we  not  justified  in  claiming 
that  this  '*Law  of  Attraction"  is  the  Basis  of 
All  Energy,  Force  and  Motion?  And  are  we 
not  justified  in  thinking  of  this  **Law  of  At- 

148 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTKACTION 

traction'*  as  always  manifesting  in  the  direc- 
tion of  drawing  together  particles  of  Substance 
— be  those  particles  suns,  planets,  masses,  mole- 
cules, atoms  or  corpuscles — in  pursuance  of 
some  basic  law  imposed  upon  All-things,  by 
That-which-is-above-Things  1 

The  following  quotation  is  interesting,  in  our 
consideration  of  this  subject: 

**  There  are  other  forces  besides  gravity,  and 
one  of  the  most  active  of  these  is  chemical  af- 
finity. Thus,  for  instance,  an  atom  of  oxygen 
has  a  very  strong  attraction  for  one  of  carbon, 
and  we  may  compare  these  two  atoms  to  the 
earth  and  a  stone  lodged  upon  the  top  of  a 
house.  Within  certain  limits,  this  attraction  is 
intensely  powerful,  so  that  when  an  atom  of 
carbon  and  one  of  oxygen  have  been  separated 
from  each  other,  we  have  a  species  of  energy  of 
position  just  as  truly  as  when  a  stone  has  been 
separated  from  the  earth.  Thus  by  having  a 
large  quantity  of  oxygen  and  a  large  quantity 
of  carbon  in  separate  states,  we  are  in  posses- 
sion of  a  large  store  of  energy  of  position. 
When  we  allowed  the  stone  and  the  earth  to 
rush  together,  the  energy  of  position  was  trans- 
formed into  that  of  actual  motion,  and  we  should 
therefore  expect  something  similar  to  happen 
when  the  separated  carbon  and  oxygen  are  al- 
lowed to  rush  together.    This  takes  place  when 

149 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

we  burn  coal  in  our  fires,  and  the  primary  re- 
sult, as  far  as  energy  is  concerned,  is  the  pro- 
duction of  a  large  amount  of  heat.  We  are, 
therefore,  led  to  conjecture  that  heat  may  de- 
note a  motion  of  particles  on  the  small  scale 
just  as  the  rushing  together  of  the  stone  and 
the  earth  denotes  a  motion  on  the  large.  It 
thus  appears  that  we  may  have  invisible  molec- 
ular energy  as  well  as  visible  mechanical  en- 
ergy.''— Balfour  Stewart. 
\;f^  To  the  writer  it  seems  that  the  Particle  of 
\  Substance  finds  within  its  Mind-principle  (for 
you  know  we  have  seen  that  all  Substance  had 
something  akin  to  Life  and  Mind)  a  constant 
craving,  imbedded  in  its  very  nature,  which 
causes  it  to  seek  Satisfaction.  This  craving  for 
Satisfaction  results  in  Unrest,  and  seeks  a  solu- 
tion along  two  lines.  These  two  lines  are  indi- 
cated by  two  entirely  different  Desires  that  it 
finds  within  itself — the  first  being  a  Desire  or 
Inclination  to  seek  the  companionship  of  some 
other  Particle — the  second  being  a  Desire  or 
Inclination  to  be  Free  of  Attachment  or  Entan- 
glement. 
/f  The  Desire  for  Attachment  arises  from  the 
<  force  of  the  Law  of  Attraction  that  exists  be- 
tween each  Particle  of  Substance.  The  Desire 
for  Non-attachment  arises  from  some  inward 
inclination  for  Freedom.    These  two  Desires  or 

150 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTEACTION 

Inclinations  may  be  called  the  Desire  for  Im- 
pression and  the  Desire  for  Expression. 

The  Desire  for  Impression  (or  pressing  in) 
manifests  along  lines  of  action  tending  toward 
Attachment,  Moreness,  Companionship,  Com- 
bination. The  Desire  for  Expression  (or 
pressing  out)  manifests  along  the  lines  of  action 
tending  toward  Individuality,  Freedom,  Inde- 
pendence, Unattachment,  etc.  And  both  are 
strong  cravings — and  both  tend  to  produce  Un- 
rest, which  results  in  Motion.  The  **pulP'  of 
the  Desire  of  Impression  exists  always,  and  is 
always  modified  and  counteracted  by  the 
**push''  of  the  Desire  for  Expression.  And, 
resulting  from  the  play  of  these  two  Desires,  or 
Forces,  result  Activity,  Motion  and  Change. 
Like  the  two  conflicting  angels  in  the  Persian 
mythology — Ahriman  and  Ormuzd — these  two 
Desires  wrestle  with  each  other  in  the  theatre 
of  the  Universe — constant  Motion  and  Change 
being  the  results.   • 

And,  if  the  writer  may  be  pardoned  for  drop- 
ping into  Mysticism  for  the  moment,  may  it 
not  be  that  these  conflicting  Desires  for  Sepa- 
rateness  and  Unity,  respectively,  are  but  differ- 
ent forms  of  the  Desire  for  Satisfaction  through 
Oneness.  Impression  seeks  Oneness  by  com- 
bination with  other  separated  Particles,  but 
finds  it  not.    Expression   seeks   Oneness   by 

151 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

drawing  apart  and  endeavoring  to  realize  it  in 
that  way,  but  finds  it  not.  But  both  are  but 
different  aspects  of  the  same  Desire  for  Satis- 
faction, and  only  when  the  Mind  recognizes 
Oneness  in  Diversity  does  Satisfaction  come. 
And  thus  the  lesson  of  the  Particle  becomes  the 
Lesson  of  the  Man.^ 

These  conflictingT)esires  of  Inclinations  of 
the  Particles — the  one  urging  it  along  the  lines 
of  Attraction — the  other  along  the  lines  of 
Separation — produce  the  Dance  of  the  Atoms 
— the  Motion  of  the  Particles. 

When  the  Particle  manifests  along  the  lines 
of  Expression  it  pushes  itself  away  from  the 
other  Particle,  and,  consequently,  also  pushes 
the  other  Particle  away.  When  it  manifests 
along  the  lines  of  Impression,  it  pulls  itself 
toward  the  other  Particle,  and  at  the  same  time 
pulls  the  other  Particle  toward  itself.  In  both 
cases  the  '* medium"  of  the  pulling  extends  over 
the  space  separating  them,  as  will  be  described 
in  future  chapters.  This  pulling  and  pushing 
is  called  by  Chemistry  '*  Attraction  and  Eepul- 
sion*'  of  the  Particles. 

It  is  perhaps  unnecessary  to  state  that  the 
Force  of  the  Attraction  of  Cohesion  or  of  Chem- 
ical AfiSnity  is  much  stronger  than  that  of  Gravi- 
tation, in  the  case  of  the  same  Particles.  Other- 
wise, if  one  picked  up  a  piece  of  iron,  the  At- 

152 


THE  LAW  OF  ATTRACTION 

traction  of  Gravitation  would  cause  its  particles 
to  separate  and  fall  to  the  ground,  whereas, 
the  Attraction  of  Cohesion  and  that  of  Chemical 
AflSnity  enable  the  Particles  to  counteract  the 
pull  of  Gravitation,  and  thus  remain  intact. 
Compared  with  Cohesion  or  Chemical  Affinity, 
the  pull  of  Gravitation  is  incomparably  weak. 
The  force  which  holds  together  two  atoms  of 
water  represents  a  high  degree  of  dynamic 
power,  and  the  shock  of  forcible  separation  of 
chemical  atoms  produces  something  akin  to  an 
explosion.  So  we  see  that  the  Attraction  of  the 
Particles,  while  of  the  same  nature  as  Gravita- 
tion, is  much  higher  in  intensity. 

But  notwithstanding  the  power  of  the  At- 
traction, it  seems  to  be  a  matter  inherent  in  the 
nature  of  the  Particle,  and  to  represent  a  some- 
thing like  Will,  in  response  to  Desire. 

The  varying  ^^push  and  pull"  or  the  two  De- 
sires, would  necessarily  cause  a  revolution  of 
each  Particle  on  its  own  axis,  and  a  revolution 
around  each  other — besides  many  instances  of 
rushing  together  and  away  from  each  other. 
In  these  forms  of  Motion  is  to  Be  found  the 
cause  of  the  vibrations  producing  Radiant  En- 
ergy, known  as  Light,  Heat,  Electricity  and 
Magnetism. 


153 


CHAPTER  XI 

THE  THEOBY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

PPROM    the    preceding    chapters    we    have 
•■•    learned  that : 

(1)  The  forms  of  Force  or  Radiant  Energy, 
known  as  Light,  Heat,  Magnetism  and  Elec- 
tricity, are  *' Modes  of  Motion,"  arising  from 
the  Original  Motion  of  the  Particles  of  Sub- 
stance (Molecules,  Atoms,  Corpuscles  or  Elec- 
trons). And  that  such  Original  Motion  of  the 
Particles  arises  from  the  Operation  of  The  Law 
of  Attraction ; 

(2)  That  the  forms  of  Attractive  Force  or 
Energy,  known  as  Gravitation,  Cohesion,  Adhe- 
sion, Atomic  Attraction,  Chemical  Affinity  or 
Chemism,  and  Corpuscular  Attraction,  also 
arise  from  the  operation  of  the  Law  of  Attrac- 
tion ; 

(3)  That,  from  the  above,  it  follows  that: 
All  Manifestations  of  Force  and  Energy  in  In- 
organic Substance  (viz.,  both  Radiant  Energy 
in  its  forms  of  Light,  Heat,  Magnetism,  Elec- 
tricity, etc. ;  and  also  Attractive  Energy  in  its 
forms    of    Gravitation,    Cohesion,    Adhesion, 

154 


THE  THEORY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Chemical  Affinity  or  Atomic  Attraction  and 
Corpuscular  Attraction)  arise  from  the  opera- 
tion of  the  Law  of  Attraction. 

It  will  be  well  to  remember  that  the  fact  that 
some  of  the  above  forms  of  Radiant  Force  or 
Energy,  such  as  Heat,  Light,  Magnetism  and 
Electricity,  may  arise  from  ISEotion  transmitted 
from  other  Substance,  does  not  alter  the  mat- 
ter. For  if  they  arise  from  *^ waves''  from 
some  other  Substance,  it  merely  follows  that 
the  Original  Motion  that  gave  rise  to  the 
** waves"  arose  from  the  operation  of  the  Law 
of  Attraction.*  Or,  if  they  arise  from  ** inter- 
rupted Motion,''  it  merely  follows  that  the  Mo- 
tion that  is  interrupted  may  be  traced  back  to 
Original  Motion  that  arose  from  the  operation 
of  the  Law  of  Attraction.  So  that  all  Mechan- 
ical Power,  and  all  the  forms  of  Energy  or 
Force  producing  the  same  (omitting  for  the 
moment  the  forms  of  Energy  or  Force  of  **  Liv- 
ing Organisms,"  which  will  be  described  later 
on)  arise  from  the  operation  of  the  Law  of  At- 
traction. 

Now,  for  the  next  step.  We  have  seen  that 
the  operation  of  the  Law  of  Attraction  results 
from  Vital-Mental  Action  on  the  part  of  the 
Life  and  Mind  Principle  inherent  in  the  nature 
of  the  Particles  of  Substance.  Consequently, 
all  forms  of  Energy  and  Force  arising  from  the 

155 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

operation  of  The  Law  of  Attraction — the  latter 
being  the  result  of  Vital-Mental  Action — then 
it  follows  that : 

All  forms  of  Energy  and  Force  having  its 
origin  in  the  Law  of  Attraction  are  manifesta- 
tions of  Vital-Mental  Action, 

But  this  is  not  all — for  we  have  not  consid- 
ered the  Energy  and  Force  abiding  in,  and  mani- 
fested by,  what  are  called  ** Living  Organisms," 
such  as  human,  animal  and  plant  life,  which  are 
manifested  by  the  physical  organisms  or 
** bodies''  of  man,  animal  and  plant.  In  order 
to  avoid  a  long  digression  into  the  realms  of 
biology,  we  will  omit  all  but  a  passing  reference 
to  the  theories  that  seek  to  identify  the  action 
of  the  cells  of  organic  life  with  those  of  the 
particles  of  inorganic  life — for  remember,  that 
Organic  Substance  has  its  Molecules,  Atoms 
and  Corpuscles,  as  well  as  its  higher  combina- 
tions known  as  **  Cells  "—and  we  will  seek  the 
ultimate  source  of  all  forms  of  Force  and  En- 
ergy, exhibited  by  *' Organic  Life,"  in  that 
which  Ues  back  of  ** Physical  Action."  We 
need  no  argument  here — for  all  will  readily 
recognize  that  behind  the  physical  action  of 
man,  animal  and  plant,  lies  Life  and  Mind,  and 
that  therefore  all  Force  and  Energy  arising 
from  such  action  must  be  manifestations  of 
Vital-Mental  Action. 

156 


THE  THEOEY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

And  SO,  summing  up  our  conclusions  regard- 
ing Force  and  Energy  and  Motion  in  Inor- 
ganic Substance — and  then  in  Organic  Sub- 
stance— we  arrive  at  an  understanding  of  the 
Basic  Proposition  of  the  Theory  of  Dynamic 
Thought,  which  is  as  follows : 

Basic  Proposition. — That  All  forms  and  ex- 
hibition  of  Force,  Energy,  Motion  and  Power 
are  manifestations  of  Vital-Mental  Action. 
And  that,  consequently,  at  the  last  there  is  no 
Force  hut  Vital-Mental  Force;  no  Energy  but 
Vital-Mental  Energy;  no  Motion  but  Vital- 
Mental  Motion;  no  Power  but  Vital-Mental 
Power. 

It  is  possible  that  the  average  reader  will  fail 
to  recognize  the  tremendous  importance  of  the 
above  proposition.  It  is  most  revolutionary, 
and  is  not  only  directly  opposed  to  the  Mate- 
rialistic theory  which  makes  Matter  the  domi- 
nant factor — the  only  factor,  in  fact — in  Life; 
but  it  is  also  far  different  from  the  opinion  of 
the  average  person  who  has  been  taught  to 
think  of  ** blind  force,''  ^*dead  matter,"  ** me- 
chanical energy,"  *' power  of  machinery,  en- 
gines," etc.  And  yet,  you  are  invited  to  go 
back  over  the  path  that  leads  up  to  the  theory, 
and  test  and  examine  every  bit  of  the  road  for 
weak  spots — ^insecure  bridges,  etc. — the  writer 
feels  that  the  work  will  bear  examination.    He 

167 


DYNAMIC  l-HOUGHT 

thinks  that  he  has  succeeded  not  only  in  proving 
that  (1)  The  Universe  is  Alive  and  Thinking; 
and  (2)  That  Mind  is  Dominant — but  he  be- 
lieves, also,  that  he  has  made  at  least  partially 
understandable  the  old  occult  and  metaphysical 
aphorism  that  has  been  heard  so  much  in  these 
later  days — the  statement  that  **A11  is  Mind — 
Mind  is  All/' 

The  only  fact  needed  now  is  the  proof  of  the 
old  occult  theory  that  Matter  or  Substance 
blends  gradually  into  Mind,  and  that  in  the  end 
it  is  found  to  have  its  origin  there.  So  far, 
Science  has  not  given  us  this  proof,  but  it  be- 
gins to  look  that  way,  although  Science  does  not 
dream  of  what  lies  at  the  end  of  the  road  she  is 
travelling.  She  tells  us  that  she  sees  Matter 
melting  into  Force  or  Energy,  and  that  perhaps 
the  Universe  may  be  found  to  be  Energy  or 
Force,  at  the  last.  But  she  ignores  the  fact 
that  her  investigations  have  already  proven  (to 
those  who  know  how  to  combine  them)  that 
Mind  is  back  of  Force — that  all  Force  is  Mental 
Force,  at  the  last.  And,  so,  you  see  it  is  not  so 
far  a  cry  from  Matter  to  Mind  in  these  days  of 
the  Twentieth  Century.  The  bridge  is  being 
erected  by  the  Materialists,  but  the  Mentalist 
will  be  the  first  to  cross  over  it. 

But   there   are   many   important   questions 
ahead  of  us  for  consideration  in  relation  to  the 

158 


fHE  THEORY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 


Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought.    And  we  must 
hasten  on  to  them. 

One  of  the  first  questions  that  must  be  con- 
sidered is  that  of  the  transmission  of  Force, 
Energy  or  Motion.  Science  has  told  us  that 
Light  travels  and  is  ** contagious,''  that  Heat 
travels  and  is  ** contagious,''  that  Electricity 
travels  and  is  ** contagious,"  that  Magnetism 
travels  and  is  ** contagious."  But  is  has  failed 
to  find  evidences  of  Cohesive  Force,  or  Adhe- 
sive Force,  or  the  Force  of  Gravitation,  or  the 
Force  of  Chemical  Affinity,  or  the  Force  of 
Corpuscular  Affinity,  being  *^ contagious,"  and 
although  it  recognizes  that  they  must  ** travel" 
beyond  the  limits  of  the  bodies  manifesting 
them,  yet  it  has  hazarded  no  theory  or  hypo- 
thesis, worthy  of  the  name,  to  account  for  the 
phenomenon.  It  informs  us  that  Light,  Heat, 
Magnetism  and  Electricity  ** travel"  (via  waves 
of  the  ^* Ether")  at  the  rate  of  184,000  miles  per 
second — and  that  when  they  reach  their  des- 
tination the  ** Ether  waves"  set  up  similar 
vibrations  in  the  Substance  with  which  they 
come  in  contact.  The  only  explanation  of  the 
method  or  medium  of  ** travel"  is  the  ''Aristo- 
tle's Ether"  Theory,  which,  while  generally  ac- 
cepted as  a  working  hypothesis,  nevertheless, 
brings  a  broad  smile  to  the  face  of  any  thought- 
ful scientist  who  considers  it  in  detail.    As  for 

159 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

the  medium  of  the  transmission  of  Gravitation, 
Cohesion,  Chemical  Affinity  and  Molecular  Af- 
finity, Science  is  mute.  All  that  she  says  is 
that  Gravitation  is  believed  to  travel  instan- 
taneously over  distances  that  it  takes  Light, 
travelling  at  the  rate  of  184,000  miles  per  sec- 
ond, over  two  thousand  years  to  travel.  Verily, 
Gravitation  defies  Scientific  theories  and  esti- 
mates, and  laughs  at  the  ** Ether.''  Let  us 
see  if  the  Dynamic  Thought  Theory  throws  any 
light  on  the  subject! 

The  first  step  in  the  solution  of  the  problem 
of  the  transferring  and  communication  of  En- 
ergy is  the  remembrance  of  the  fact  that  the 
Energy  is  purely  Mental.  Be  it  Gravitation, 
Affinity  or  Attraction,  on  the  one  hand — or 
Light,  Heat,  Magnetism  or  Electricity  on  the 
other — it  is  all  Mental  Force.  Attraction  in  all 
of  its  forms  has  been  recognized  as  Mental  Ac- 
tion. And  the  vibartions  that  cause  Light, 
Heat,  Magnetism  and  Electricity  have  been 
seen  to  result  from  the  Law  of  Attraction,  and, 
therefore,  are  Mental.  This  being  the  case, 
would  it  not  be  wise  for  us  to  look  for  a  solution 
of  the  transmission  of  Force  and  Energy  in  the 
region  from  which  it  originated — the  Mental 
Region?  Does  not  this  seem  reasonable?  Should 
not  the  explanation  for  Mental  Effects  be 
sought  in  a  Mental  Cause?    And  should  not  the 

160 


THE  THEORY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

medium  between  Mind  and  Mind  be  looked  for 
in  the  Mental  Region? 

Taking  the  liberty  of  peeping  into  some  of 
the  succeeding  chapters  of  this  book — getting  a 
little  ahead  of  the  story,  as  it  were — let  us  con- 
sider the  operation  of  Mind  in  the  higher  forms 
of  Life.  Without  argument,  or  proof  at  this 
point,  let  us  remember  the  well-founded  state- 
ments of  fact — and  the  old  occult  teachings  as 
well — that  the  Mind  is  not  confined  to  the  limits 
of  the  body,  but  extends  as  an  '^Aura"  for  some 
distance  beyond  the  physical  form.  Let  us  also 
remember  the  phenomena  grouped  together 
under  the  general  subject  of  '^Thought-trans- 
ference, ' '  ' '  Thought  -  transmission, '  *  ' '  Tele- 
pathy,*' or  (the  best  term  of  all)  ''Telesthesia" 
(meaning,  literally  **far-off  sensation' 0-  The 
writer  imagines  that  he  hears  the  yell  of  derision 
go  up  at  this  point  from  the  materialistic  per- 
sonage, or  ''man  on  the  street,''  who  has  been 
induced  to  read  this  book  by  some  well  meaning 
friend.  "Thought-transference,  Fiddlesticks," 
we  may  hear  him  cry,  in  imagination.  But  let 
this  reader  remember — Fiddlesticks,  or  no  Fid- 
dlesticks— that  Thought-transmission  is  a 
proven  fact — and  that  thousands  of  people 
know  it  to  be  so,  absolutely,  from  their  own  ex- 
perience. It  is  too  late  in  the  day  for  sneers  at 
the  mention  of  the  term. 

161 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Well,  then,  since  Force  is  Mental,  and  we  are 
looking  for  a  Mental  explanation  for  the  pheno- 
menon of  Transmission  of  Force,  does  it  not 
seem  natural  to  consider  Thought-transmission 
in  that  connection!  Answering  a  possible  ob- 
jection of  some  critical  reader,  to  the  effect  that 
before  a  ''sensation''  may  be  received,  the  re- 
ceiver must  have  ''sense-organs'' — a  very  good 
objection,  but  one  that  is  answered  by  Science 
itself — let  us  read  on. 

Haeckel,  the  distinguished  scientist,  in  his 
endeavor  to  prove  that  Man's  senses  are  but  a 
development  of  something  in  inorganic  life,  has 
called  our  attention  to  the  fact  that  Molecules, 
and  Atoms,  are  capable  of  "receiving"  sensa- 
tions and  "responding"  thereto.  He  makes 
quite  a  point  of  this  in  his  latest  works,  and  re- 
marks, among  many  other  things  showing  his 
positive  views  on  the  subject  of  "sensation  in 
the  inorganic  world":  "/  cannot  imagin)e  the 
simplest  chemical  and  physical  process  without 
attributing  the  movements  of  the  material  par- 
ticles to  unconscious  sensation**;  and  again: 
''The  idea  of  chemical  affinity  consists  in  the 
fact  that  the  various  chemical  elements  perceive 
the  qualitative  differences  in  other  elements — 
experience  'pleasure*  or  'revulsion*  at  contact 
with  them,  and  execute  specific  movements  on 
this  ground.**   He  also  quotes,  approvingly,  the 

162 


THE  THEORY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

remarks  of  Nageli,  who  said;  "7/  the  mole- 
cules possess  something  that  is  related,  however 
distantly,  to  sensation,  it  must  be  comfortable 
to  be  able  to  follow  their  attractions  and  repul- 
sions; uncomfortable  when  they  are  forced  to 
do  otherwise/^  Haeckel  also  says  that  in  his 
opinion  the  sensations  in  animal  and  plant  life 
are  ^*  connected  by  a  long  series  of  evolutionary 
stages  with  the  simpler  forms  of  sensation  that 
we  find  in  the  inorganic  elements,  and  that  re- 
veal themselves  in  chemical  affinity/'  Is  not 
this  strong  enough?  Perhaps  we  may  now  be 
permitted  at  least  to  ** assume*'  that  even  the 
Atoms,  Molecules  and  Corpuscles  have  **  some- 
thing like  sensation. ' ' 

Some  one  may  now  object  that  Haeckel 
speaks  of  ^^ contact''  between  the  particles,  and 
that  sensation  by  contact  (even  in  an  atom)  is 
far  different  from  sensation  without  contact,  at 
a  short  distance.  Quite  right,  but  if  the  ob- 
jector will  take  the  trouble  to  review  the  teach- 
ings of  Science  regarding  the  relation  of  the 
Particles,  he  will  see  that  the  Particles  are 
never  **  exactly  *'  in  contact,  except  in  moments 
of  collision,  which,  by  the  way,  they  carefully 
avoid.  The  Corpuscles,  as  we  have  shown,  have 
*  Aplenty  of  room"  in  which  to  move  about,  and 
they  move  in  orbits  around  each  other.  The 
Atoms  combine,  but  there  is  always  room  be- 

163 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

tween  them,  as  may  be  seen  by  reference  to  the 
teachings  regarding  the  ** Ether/'  which  *^ fills 
up  the  cracks''  according  to  the  theory.  And 
the  Molecules  also  have  '^plenty  of  room/^  as 
may  be  seen  by  reference  to  that  part  of  the 
subject,  particularly  to  the  comparison  of  the 
drop  of  water  magnified  to  the  size  of  the  Earth, 
in  which  the  Molecules  would  appear  about  the 
size  of  the  original  drop  with  more  room  be- 
tween each  than  their  own  size. 

In  fact,  as  we  have  been  shown  in  a  previous 
chapter,  the  particles  are  attracted  only  to  a 
certain  distance,  at  which  they  resist  the  im- 
pulse or  attraction  and  '*  stand  off "  a  bit.  They 
will  not  be  forced  too  near  without  creating  dis- 
turbances, and  manifestations  of  force,  and  if 
they  are  separate  beyond  a  certain  distance  the 
attractive  power  ceases  to  operate.  But  there 
is  always  some  room  between  them,  and  they 
bridge  over  that  room  and  exert  and  receive 
the  attractive  power  in  some  way.  This  is  true 
not  only  of  the  particles  but  of  the  great  bodies, 
like  the  Earth  and  planets,  that  are  attracted, 
and  attract  over  great  distances.  Now  for  the 
question:  *^How  do  they  exert  sense  and  at- 
tractive power  over  the  great  comparative  dis- 
tance— great,  comparatively,  as  well  in  atom,  as 
in  planet  and  sun? 

Some  one  may  answer  the  question  closing 
164 


THE  THEORY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

the  last  paragraph  with  the  word  ^'Electricity/' 
Very  good— Electricity,  like  the  ''Ether,'' 
comes  in  quite  handy  when  one  is  forced  to  ex- 
plain something  not  known.  ''Electricity,'' 
like  the  "Glacial  Period,"  "Aristotle's 
Ether,"  "Natural  Laws,"  and  "Suggestion," 
is  a  most  handy  weapon  of  argument,  and  often 
acts  as  a  preventative  to  further  inquiry  and 
investigation  until  some  sufficiently  irreverent 
of  precedent  arises  to  ask,  "But  Why  and 
How?"  and  starts  the  ball  rolling  again. 

But  "Electricity"  will  not  answer  in  this 
case,  for  the  rate  of  the  "travel"  of  Electricity 
is  well  known — 184,000  miles  per  second,  which, 
fast  as  it  is,  assumes  the  crawl  of  a  "slow- 
freight"  when  compared  with  the  "instan- 
taneous" rate  of  travel  of  Gravitation.  And 
then  Electricity  requires  a  "medium"  and 
Gravitation  does  not,  and  in  many  other  ways 
the  two  are  seen  to  be  totally  different.  And  in 
the  case  of  the  Space  between  the  Atom  and 
Molecule  and  Corpuscle,  it  is  no  more  reason- 
able to  say  "Electricity"  than  it  would  be  to 
say  "Heat"  or  "Light";  and  "Magnetism"  is 
not  available  for  obvious  reasons.  Eemember 
that  Electricity,  Light  and  Heat  are  caused  by 
Motion  resulting  from  Attraction,  and  the  child 
cannot  procreate  the  parent.  Heat,  Light  and 
Electricity  may  beget  each  other  (and  they  do). 

165 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

And  Gravitation  may  procreate  Heat,  Light  and 
Electricity.  But  Heat,  Light  and  Electricity 
cannot  procreate  Gravitation — Never !  And 
Light,  Heat  and  Electricity  require  replenish- 
ing from  the  common  source  of  Energy,  but 
Gravitation  is  self-sufficient  and  asks  no  re- 
plenishing or  storage-battery  or  power-house. 
Electricity,  Heat  and  Light  come  and  go,  ap- 
pearing, manifesting  and  disappfearing,  swal- 
lowed up  by  each  other,  or  by  Substance.  But 
Gravitation  is  always  there — unchangeable — 
unwavering  —  immutable  —  invariable  — 
Something  above  Matter  and  Force — something 
majestic,  awe-inspiring,  sublime !  Does  it  take 
a  wild  flight  of  the  imagination  to  see  that  this 
Something,  that  is  not  Matter,  and  nor  Force, 
7nust  he  a  manifestation  of  Mind? 

Let  us  first  apply  this  idea  of  Thought-trans- 
ference to  the  operation  of  the  Law  of  Attrac- 
tion between  the  Corpuscles,  Atoms  and  Mole- 
cules of  Substance — the  Particles  of  Substance. 
The  particles  are  believed  to  move  to  or  away 
from  each  other  in  accordance  with  the  work- 
ings of  Attraction  and  Affinity,  in  its  various 
degrees.  First  they  must  desire  to  move — ^not 
Desire  in  the  developed  sense  that  we  feel  it, 
but  still  elementary  '^feeling,'*  or  'inclina- 
tion,*' or  *' tendency'' — call  it  what  you  will, 
but  it  remains  rudimentary  Mental  Emotion — 

166 


THE  THEOEY  OP  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

an  E-motion  leading  to  Motion.  (This  is  not  a 
pun — ^look  up  the  meaning  of  the  word  Emo- 
tion and  you  will  see  its  application.) 

Then,  following  the  Desire,  comes  the  action 
in  the  direction  of  gratifying  it.  The  Particles 
act  to  gratify  Desire  in  two  ways — acting  at  a 
** distance,"  remember — they  exert  the  Attrac- 
tive Force,  which  the  writer  believes  to  be  Men- 
tal Force,  transmitted  by  Mind,  projection,  a 
mental  or  psychic  bond  or  connection  being  thus 
established.  By  means  of  this  bond  of  Mind, 
the  Particle  endeavors  to  (1)  draw  itself  to  the 
object;  and  (2)  to  draw  the  object  toward  itself. 
In  the  case  of  the  Molecule,  this  Desire  and 
Movement  seems  to  be  mutual,  and  evidenced 
by  and  to  all  Molecules  alike,  providing  they  be 
within  Molecular  Distance,  as  Science  calls  it. 
But  in  the  case  of  the  Atoms,  it  seems  to  be 
different — for  there  is  found  a  greater  degree 
of  ** choice,"  or  elective  aflSnity."  This  ** elec- 
tion" or  ** choice"  is  not  altogether  free,  but 
depends  upon  the  relative  likes  and  dislikes  of 
certain  '* kinds"  of  elements,  as  we  have  seen 
in  previous  chapters,  although,  to  be  sure,  these 
Elements  are  all  made  out  of  the  same  ** stuff" 
in  different  combinations. 

The  details  of  Corpuscular  Attraction  are  not 
known,  so  it  cannot  be  told  whether  **  prefer- 
ences" exist,  or  whether  (in  the  words  of  the 

167 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

street)  all  Corpuscles  **look  alike'*  to  each 
other.  It  would  appear,  however,  that  there 
must  be  some  reasons  for  preference,  among 
the  Corpuscles,  else  they  would  always  form  in 
the  same  combinations — always  act  alike  to 
each  other,  as  they  are  alike  in  other  actions — 
and  thus  there  would  be  but  one  Element  or 
kind  of  Atom,  formed,  instead  of  the  seventy - 
five,  already  known.  To  be  sure,  in  this  case, 
it  might  be  that  the  one  kind  of  Atom  formed 
would  be  the  Atom  of  Hydrogen,  and  that  all 
other  Elements,  or  Atoms,  were  modifications 
of  that  one — just  proving  the  dream  of  the  Sci- 
entists of  the  Nineteenth  Century.  But,  as  Kip- 
ling would  say,  **that  is  another  story.'' 

To  return  to  the  Particle  which  we  left  trying 
to  draw  the  other  Particle  to  itself,  and  itself 
toward  the  other.  There  is  no  material  con- 
nection between  them  (and  Electricity  and 
Magnetism  will  not  answer),  so  what  is  to  be 
done?  Evidently  the  Particle  knows,  for  it  ex- 
erts a  ** drawing"  power  or  force  hy  means  of 
the  Mental-connection,  and  two  come  together, 
The  Particle  evidently  is  able  to  exert  a  repel- 
ling or  ** moving  away"  power  by  reversing  the 
process,  the  Mental-bond  acting  as  the  medium. 
This  may  cause  a  smile,  because  we  have  never 
seen  an  instance  of  bodies  pulling  themselves 
together  by  intangible  ** bonds."    HavenH  we? 

168 


THE  THEORY  OF  DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Then  how  about  two  pieces  of  magnetised  steel, 
or  two  electrified  substances?  Oh,  that's  differ- 
ent, you  say.  Why,  different?  Isn't  the  bond 
intangible?  And,  haven't  we  seen  that  both 
Electricity  and  Magnetism  were  Mental  Actions 
alsof  Oh, — er — but  well, — oh  yes,  that's  it — 
perhaps  the  Attracting  Force  is  Magnetism  or 
Electricity.  No,  that  will  not  do,  for  we  have 
seen  that  Electricity  and  Magnetism  were  prod- 
ucts of  this  Attraction,  not  producers  of  it — the 
Attraction  must  come  before  Electricity  and 
Magnetism,  not  after  them — ^you  are  mixing 
Cause  and  Effect.  And,  even  if  you  were  right 
—and  you  cannot  be — ^wouldn't  the  Electrical 
or  Magnetic  Force  be  called  into  operation,  and 
directed  by  the  Mental  Action,  arising  from  the 
Desire?  You  cannot  get  away  from  Mental 
Action  when  you  study  the  Law  of  Attraction. 

**But,  how  about  the  fact  that  Heat  causes 
the  Particles  to  change  their  vibrations,  and 
draw  apart,  and  all  that  sort  of  thing — and 
Electricity,  likewise?"  you  may  ask.  *^ Surely 
this  takes  the  matter  away  from  Mental  Action, 
doesn't  it?"  Well,  the  writer  thinks  that  the 
phenomenon  referred  to  only  helps  to  prove  his 
theory.  And  he  will  endeavor  to  so  prove  to 
you. 

The  consideration  of  the  facts  related  in  this 
chapter,  leads  us  to  a  supplemental  proposition 

169 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

to  our  Basic  Proposition,  which  may  be  stated 
as  follows : 

Supplemental  Proposition  I. — Not  only  is  the 
Law  of  Attraction  the  manifestation  of  a  Men- 
tal Process,  or  Vital-Mental  Action;  but  also  the 
actual  Force  or  Energy  used  in  bringing  the 
Particles  of  Substance  in  closer  relation,  in 
accordance  with  that  Law,  is  in  its  nature  a 
Vital  Mental  Force  or  Energy,  operating  be- 
tween bodies  or  particles  of  Substance,  without 
a  material  medium. 


170 


CHAPTER  Xn 

THE  LAW   OF   VIBRANT   ENERGY 

TN  previous  chapters  we  have  seen  that  the 
-■■  phenomena  of  Radiant  Energy,  known  as 
Light,  Heat,  Magnetism  and  Electricity,  had 
their  origin  in  the  Motion  of  the  Particles,  the 
different  classes  of  phenomena  depending  upon 
the  particular  degree  and  nature  of  the  afore- 
said Motion  of  Particles. 

We  have  seen  also  that  Radiant  Energy  could 
be  communicated  or  transmitted  from  one  body 
of  Substance  to  another.  And  that  the  com- 
munication of  transmission  might  be  accom- 
plished not  only  by  close  contact  of  the  bodies, 
but  by  *  Waves''  of  some  sort  which  were  caused 
in  some  '* medium''  (the  Ether)  by  the  vibra- 
tions of  the  Particles  of  the  body,  and  which 
** waves,'*  when  they  reached  the  other  body, 
were  transformed  into  vibrations  of  the  Par- 
ticles corresponding  to  those  manifested  in  the 
first  body.  The  idea  has  been  illustrated  by  the 
sending  telephone,  the  sound  waves  in  the 
diaphragm   of  which  were  transformed  into 

in 


k 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

waves  of  the  Electric  current,  and  thus  passing 
along  the  wires  were  transformed  again  into 
sound-waves  by  the  diaphragm  of  the  receiving 
instrument. 

We  have  seen,  also  in  the  preceding  chapter, 
that  the  medium  by  which  these  vibrations  were 
transferred,  transmitted,  or  communicated, 
might  be  supposed  to  be  Mind,  the  operation 
being  akin  to  Thought-transference.  Now  let 
us  examine  into  the  workings  of  the  matter. 

In  the  first  place,  we  assume  a  certain  state  of 
vibration,  existing  in  a  certain  body  of  Sub- 
stance— Heat,  or  Electricity  for  instance  (either 
illustration  will  answer.)  Another  body  of 
Substance  is  brought  in  close  contact  with  the 
first  body,  and  the  vibrations  of  Energy  pass 
on  to  the  second,  not  by  ** waves"  but  by  a  seem- 
ing actual  passing  of  vibrations  without  the 
need  of  intervening  ^^ waves.''  This,  Science 
calls  transmission  by  Conduction,  the  theory 
being  that  the  particles  rapidly  **pass  on''  the 
vibrations  from  one  to  another.  Convection  or 
conduction  along  other  forms  of  Substance, 
such  as  hot-air,  hot-water-steam,  etc.,  is  but  a 
variation  of  the  above,  as  Substance  is  the 
medium  in  both  cases.  The  third  form  of  trans- 
mission is  by  Radiation,  whereby  the  vibrations 
are  transmitted  by  ''waves"  in  some  medium 
other  than  Substance  (according  to  the  theory), 

172 


h 


THE  LAW  OF  VIBRANT  ENERGY. 

as  we  have  described  in  a  preceding  paragraph, 
as  well  as  in  previous  chapters  As  a  matter 
of  fact,  a  careful  analysis  of  the  matter  will 
show  that  even  in  the  *^  Conduction ''  of  the 
most  solid  Substance,  there  must  be  a  ^'medium 
not  Substance'^  between  the  Particles  of  the 
Substance,  for  the  Particles  always  have  Space 
between  them — this  being  true  of  the  Particles 
of  Air,  as  well  as  those  of  Iron.  So  there  is 
always  Space  to  be  traversed  by  a  ^^ medium  not 
Substance/'  But  we  need  not  stop  to  split- 
hairs  regarding  this  question,  for  the  general 
explanation  will  explain  this  also. 

Now,  to  get  back  to  our  body  of  Substance 
vibrating  with  Eadiant  Energy,  separated  from 
a  second  body  of  Substance  by  a  great  distance 
— thousands  of  miles  in  fact — millions  would 
be  better — ^let  us  take  two  worlds,  for  instance 
— the  Sun  and  the  Earth.  Ignoring  for  the 
moment  the  explanation  of  Gravitations  (which 
will  be  given  later)  and  realizing  that  there  is 
no  medium  of  Substance  existing  between  the 
two  bodies,  we  must  grant  that  there  is  a 
*^ medium  not  Substance"  existing  between 
them,  either  permanently  or  thrown  out  for  the 
purpose  of  this  special  transmission.  We  shall 
assume  a  medium  existing  before  the  need  of 
the  transmission  (for  reasons  to  be  seen  later.) 
Our  Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought,  and  Thought- 

173 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Transference  between  bodies  of  Substance,  com- 
pels us  to  suppose  that  this  medium  is  a  Mental 
Connection,  or  Mental  Relation,  existing  be- 
tween the  two  bodies  of  Substance,  So,  we  must 
consider  the  question  of  this  medium  of  Mind 
transmitting  the  vibrations  of  Radiant  Energy 
from  the  Sun  to  the  Earth.  How  can  Mind  con- 
duct Radiant  Energy?  It  does  not  conduct 
Radiant  Energy,  but  it  does  transmit — ^not 
Radiant  Energy — ^but  the  Mental  State  that 
causes  Radiant  Energy  Vibrations, 

This  statement  of  a  '*  Mental  State  causing 
Radiant  Energy  Vibrations '*  seems  rather 
startling  at  first  sight — ^but  let  us  examine  it. 
We  have  seen  that  the  Radiant  Energy  was 
caused  by  the  Motion  or  Vibrations  of  the  Par- 
ticles, which  Motion  or  Vibration  was  the  re- 
sult of  the  workings  of  the  Law  of  Attraction, 
and  which  Law  was  but  the  manifestation  of 
Vital-Mental  Action.  And,  at  the  last,  the 
Vibrations  of  Radiant  Energy  are  the  result 
of  peculiar  or  particular  '* states"  of  the  Life 
and  Mind  of  the  Particle.  The  word  *  ^  State ' '  is 
derived  from  the  Latin  word  Status,  meaning 
** position;  standing,''  and  is  used  generally  in 
the  sense  of  ** condition." 

This  Mental  State  of  the  Particle  may  be 
described  as  a  state  of  '* Emotional  Excite- 
ment/' Let  us  pause  a  moment  to  consider  the 

174 


I 


THE  LAW  OF  VIBRANT  ENERGY. 

meaning  of  these  words — it  often  helps  us  to 
understand  a  subject,  if  we  examine  the  real 
meaning  of  the  words  defining  it.  ** Emotion*' 
is  derived  from  the  Latin  word  Emotum,  mean- 
ing **to  shake;  to  stir  up'* — the  Latin  word 
being  made  up  of  two  other  words,  i.  e,,  E, 
meaning  *'ouf ;  and  Motum,  *'to  move.*' 
** Emotion''  is  defined  as  **a  moving  or  excite- 
ment of  the  mind.'*  ** Excitement''  is  derived 
from  the  Latin  word  Excitare,  meaning  **to 
move  out" — the  English  word  being  defined  as 
*'a  calling  to  Activity;  state  of  Active  feeling; 
aroused  Activity."  So  you  see  that  the  idea 
of  Active  Motion,  and  Aroused  Activity,  of 
Mind,  permeates  the  term  **  Emotional  Excite- 
ment," that  is  used  by  the  writer  in  connection 
with  the  Mental  State  causing  vibration  of  the 
Particles  of  Substance.  The  single  word,  **  Ex- 
citement," will  be  used  by  the  writer,  hereafter, 
in  the  above  connection,  in  order  to  avoid  com- 
plex terms.  To  those  who  still  object  to  the  use 
of  a  mental  term  in  reference  to  motion  of  Sub- 
stance, he  might  remark  that  Science  makes  use 
of  the  term — ** Excite,"  and  ** Excitement" — 
in  reference  to  Electrical  phenomena,  so  that 
he  is  not  altogether  without  support  in  the  use 
of  the  word. 

Now  to  return  again  to  our  body  of  Substance 
— the  Sun — the  Particles  of  which  are  manif  est- 

175 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

ing  a  great  degree  of  ** Excitement,*'  evidencing 
in  Vibrations  producing  the  phenomenon  of 
Eadiant  Energy.  The  excitement  is  shared 
equally  by  its  Particles,  the  ** contagion"  having 
spread  among  them.  Even  the  Particles  of  its 
atmosphere  are  vibrating  with  Excitement,  and 
evidencing  Eadiant  Energy.  The  Sun  is  in 
direct  Mental  Connection  with  the  Earth  (as 
we  shall  see  presently)  and  the  Excitement  is 
transmitted  by  Thought-Transference  (along 
this  Mental  Connection)  in  the  shape  of  Dyna- 
mic Thought-waves  of  Excitement.  These  waves 
have  a  rate  of  speed  of  184,000  miles  per  sec- 
ond— why  this  particular  rate,  or  any  rate  at 
all,  is  not  apparent ;  it  being  very  evident,  how- 
ever, that  this  particular  kind  of  Mental  Action 
— Excitement,  or  Thought — is  not  transmitted 
instantaneously  as  is  the  Mental  Quality  known 
as  Desire,  resulting  in  Attraction,  or  Gravita- 
tion, which  seems  to  be  rather  a  Basic  quality, 
rather  than  a  temporary  disturbance  or  emo- 
tional excitement.  But  the  writer  must  not  get 
ahead  of  his  story. 

The  Excitement  of  the  Particles  of  Substance 
composing  the  Sun  is  ** contagious,"  and  the 
Thought-waves  travel  along  the  Mental  Con- 
nection, or  medium,  at  a  wonderful  rate  of 
speed.  Soon  they  come  in  contact  with  the  Men- 
tal Atmosphere  of  the  Earth  and  the  Excite- 

176 


THE  LAW  OF  VIBKANT  ENEBGY. 

ment  becomes  manifest  in  Action,  the  Emo- 
tional Excitement  being  reproduced  by  the  Par- 
ticles of  the  Earth's  Substance  nearest  the  sur- 
face which  vibrate  and  manifest  the  Radiant 
Energy  in  spite  of  themselves,  for  the  tendency 
among  Particles  is  to  ** settle  down,"  and  re- 
main *^calm,''  rather  than  to  participate  in 
Emotional  Excitement.  They  have  acquired  a 
normal  and  fixed  rate  of  Vibration,  or  Mental 
State,  after  many  years,  gradually  changing 
from  a  high  state  of  Excitement,  to  a  compara- 
tive calm  state.  And,  their  tendency  and  in- 
clination is  Conservative,  and  they  are  disposed 
to  resent  and  repel  Radical  states  of  Excite- 
ment or  Disturbance,  coming  from  other  less 
Conservative  Bodies. 

The  above  fact  partially  explains  why  the 
communicated  Excitement  manifests  itself  more 
strongly  on  the  surface  of  the  body  ** exposed" 
to  the  contagion  of  Excitement.  The  Conserva- 
tive influence  is  always  at  work,  and  manages 
to  absorb  and  equally  distribute  the  Energy 
that  is  beating  down  upon  it,  without  allowing 
it  to  penetrate  very  far.  The  Energy  is  used-up 
or  absorbed,  and  neutralized  by  the  lower  vibra- 
tions of  the  Mass.  The  effort  of  the  Energy 
coming  from  the  sending  Body  is  to  ** bring-up" 
the  vibrations  of  the  receiving  body  to  the  rate 
of  the  sender ;  while  the  effort  of  the  receiving 

i7r 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

body  is  to  resist  this  effort,  and  to  reduce  and 
** bring-down'*  the  transmitted  increased  rate 
of  vibration  of  the  Particles  immediately  ex- 
posed to  the  contagion.  In  both  cases  the  effort 
is  toward  *' equalization  *'  of  the  rate  of  vibra- 
tions. This  working  of  the  law  may  be  observed 
plainly  in  the  case  of  Heat  vibrations — the 
Energy  seeming  to  wish  to  ** bring-up''  the 
vibrations  or  temperature  of  the  second  body, 
while  the  latter  resists  this  effort,  and  strives 
to  ''bring-down"  the  vibrations  or  temperature 
of  those  Particles  of  itself  that  have  ''caught 
the  Motion."  The  Energy  is  like  a  Radical 
Agitator  who  wishes  to  stir  up  an  Excitement, 
leading  to  "a  change,"  while  the  Body  is  like 
the  Conservative  element  that  prefers  to  "let 
well  enough  alone,"  and  resists  the  stirring-up 
process,  and  exerts  itself  to  restore  quiet,  and 
to  maintain  accustomed  conditions. 

The  explanation  of  the  phenomenon  given  in 
any  work  on  Physics  or  Natural  Philosophy  will 
answer  fairly  well  in  the  consideration  of  this 
Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought,  the  only  import- 
ant change  being  required,  being  the  substitu- 
tion of  "Thought-waves"  for  "Waves  of  the 
Ether"  of  Science.  Science  has  described  the 
"working  operations,"  as  might  be  expected 
from  her  years  of  careful  study  and  examina- 
tion.   She  has  erred  only  in  the  Theory  or 

178 


I 


THE  LAW  OF  VIBRANT  ENERGY. 

Hypothesis  advanced  to  account  for  the  facts. 
Her  *  ^  Ether  ^'  handed  down  by  Aristotle,  is  ad- 
mitted by  her  to  be  paradoxical  and  **  unthink- 
able''— ^but  she  has  had  none  other  to  substitute 
for  it.  She  will  probably  sneer  at  the  Dynamic 
Thought,  and  Thought-Transference  theory  ad- 
vanced in  this  book — if  indeed  she  takes  the 
trouble  to  examine  it.  But  sometime,  from  her 
own  ranks — among  her  most  advanced  mem- 
bers— ^will  arise  a  man  who  will  claim  that  **A11 
Force  is  Mental  Force,''  and  that  ** Transfer- 
ence of  Energy  is  Thought  Transference." 
And  the  Scientific  World  will  accept  the  doc- 
trine after  it  finds  itself  unable  to  fight  it  down 
• — and  it  will  give  new  names  and  terms  to  its 
workings.  And  it  will  proclaim  loudly  the 
**new"  Truth.  And  this  little  book,  and  its 
writer  will  be  ignored — ^but  its  work  will  go  on. 
The  writer  although  probably  doomed  to  have 
himself  and  his  theory  laughed  at  by  the  masses 
of  people  (whose  children  will  accept  the  teach- 
ings of  this  book)  does  not  feel  discouraged  by 
the  prospect.  He  cares  nothing  for  personal 
credit — the  truth  being  the  important  thing. 
Like  Galvini,  (whose  words  appear  on  the  title 
page  of  this  book)  he  may  cry:  ''/  am  attacked 
by  two  very  opposite  sects — the  scientists  and 
the  know-nothings.  Both  laugh  at  me,  calling 
me  the  'Frog's  Dancing  Master/  but  I  know 

179 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

that  I  have  discovered   one   of  the  greatest 
Forces  in  Nature/' 

The  illustration  given  above  of  the  transmis- 
sion of  the  Excitement  of  the  Particles  of  the 
Sun  to  the  Particles  of  the  Earth,  will  answer 
equally  well  in  the  case  of  Light,  Heat,  Magnet- 
ism and  Electricity.  And  it  will  answer  in  the 
case  of  the  transmission  of  these  Forces  be- 
tween Atoms,  Molecules,  and  Masses  as  well  as 
between  Worlds  and  Solar  Systems.  Any 
bodies  subject  to  the  Law  of  Attraction  may 
and  do,  so  transmit  Vibrations.  In  our  con- 
sideration of  **The  Eiddle  of  the  Sphinx," 
which  forms  the  subject  of  the  next  chapter,  we 
shall  obtain  further  particulars  of  the  workings 
of  the  Law. 

The  consideration  of  the  facts  and  principles 
stated  in  this  chapter  brings  us  to  a  second  Sup- 
plemental Proposition,  which  may  be  stated  as 
follows : 

Supplemental  Proposition  II. — The  rates  of 
vibration  of  the  Particles  of  Suhstande  may  he 
likened  to  *' Mental  States'*;  and  a  high  degree 
of  the  same  may  he  called  an  "Excitement." 
This  "Excitement"  may  he,  and  is,  communi- 
cated from  the  Particles  of  the  hody  manifest- 
ing  it,  to  the  Particles  of  other  hodies — the 
medium  of  such  communication  heing  a  Mental 
Connection  or  Mental  Relation  existing  between 

180 


THE  LAW  OF  VIBRANT  ENERGY. 

the  two  bodies  of  Substance,  without  the  em- 
ployment  of  any  material  medium — and  which 
Excitement,  so  communicated,  reproduces  in  the 
second  body  the  vibrations  manifested  in  the 
first  body,  subject,  always,  to  the  counteracting 
efforts  of  the  second  body  to  maintain  its  ac- 
customed, and  former,  rate  of  vibration,  and 
Mental  State, 


181 


CHAPTER  Xin 

THE  KIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

T  T  is  with  no  light  emotion,  or  jaunty  air, 
•■'  that  the  writer  approaches  this  part  of  his 
subject.  On  the  contrary,  he  feels  something 
like  awe  when  he  contemplates  the  nature  of 
that  great  Something  which  he  is  called  upon 
to  attempt  to  ** explain'*  in  a  few  pages.  He 
feels,  in  only  a  lighter  degree,  the  emotion  that 
one  experiences  when,  in  occasional  moments, 
his  mind  leads  to  a  contemplation  of  The  In- 
finite. He  feels  that  that  which  men  mean  when 
they  say  '* Gravitation"  and  **The  Ether,"  are 
but  symbols  and  feeble  concepts  of  Something 
so  far  above  human  experience  that  the  Mind 
of  Man  may  grasp  only  its  lowest  shadings,  the 
greater  and  higher  part  of  it,  like  the  higher 
rays  of  the  Spectrum,  being  hidden  from  the  ex- 
perience of  Man. 

In  his  endeavor  to  pass  on  to  you  his  ideas 
regarding  the  Something  that  explains  both 
Gravitation  and  the  Ether,  he  must  ask  you  to 
endeavor  to  form  a  Mental  Picture  of  a  '*  Some- 
thing."    This  Something  must  fill  all  Space 

182 


THE  BIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

within  the  Limits  of  the  Universe,  or  Cosmos — 
if  limits  it  has.  It  must  be  an  expression  of  the 
first  of  the  attributes  of  The  Infinite — the  one 
called  Omnipresence,  or  Presence-everywhere — 
and  yet  it  must  not  he  The  Infinite  Presence,  It 
also  must  be  an  expression  of  the  second  of  the 
attributes  of  the  Infinite — the  one  called  Om- 
nipotence, or  All-Power — and  yet  it  must  not  he 
The  Infinite  Power.  It  also  must  be  an  expres- 
sion of  the  third  attribute  of  The  Infinite — the 
one  called  Omniscience,  or  All-Knowing  —  and 
yet  it  must  not  he  The  Infinite  Wisdom,  It  must 
be  an  expression  of  All  the  Attributes  that  we 
think  of  as  belonging  to  The  Infinite — and  yet 
through  them  All  we  may  see  The  Infinite, 
Itself,  in  the  hackground,  viewing  its  expres- 
sions. 

This  Something  that  you  are  asked  to  think 
of  is  that  Something  regarding  which  the  mys- 
tics have  dreamed ;  the  philosophers  have  specu- 
lated ;  the  scientists  have  sneered  and  smiled — 
that  Something  that  Men  have  thought  of  as 
The  Universal  Mind  or  the  Cosmic  Mind. 

You  are  asked  to  think  of  this  Something 
as  a  great  Ocean  of  Pure  Mind,  permeating 
all  Space — ^between  Solar  Systems — ^between 
Worlds — between  Masses  of  Substance — be- 
tween the  Molecules,  Atoms,  and  Corpuscles. 
In  and  about  and  around  everything — yes,  even 

183 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

in  Everything — in  the  very  essence  of  the  Cor- 
puscle it  is — in  truth  it  is  that  Essence  itself. 

Bound  up  in  the  bosom  of  that  Mighty  Ocean 
of  Mind  must  reside  all  Knowledge  of  the  Uni- 
verse—of all  **this  side  of  God/'  For  that 
All-Knowledge  is  but  a  knowing  of  its  own  re- 
gion. Latent  within  itself  must  be  locked  up 
all  Energy,  or  capacity  for  Force  or  Motion, 
for  all  Force  or  Energy  is  Mental.  In  its  very 
presence  it  exemplifies  the  capacity  of  filling  All 
Space.  Omnipresent;  Omnipotent;  Omniscient 
— all  the  attributes  of  The  Infinite  are  mani- 
fested in  it —  and  yet  it  is  but  the  outward  ex- 
pression  of  That-Behind-the-Veil,  which  is  the 
Causeless  Cause  of  All. 

In  that  Great  Ocean  of  Universal  or  Cosmic 
Mind,  bodies  of  Substance  are  but  as  floating 
specks  of  dust — or  even  bubbles  formed  of  the 
substance  of  that  Ocean  itself — on  the  surface 
of  that  Ocean,  there  may  arise  waves,  currents, 
ripples,  eddies,  whirlpools, — storms,  hurricanes, 
tempests, — from  its  bosom  may  rise  vapor,  that 
after  stages  of  clouds,  rain-drops,  flowing  in 
streams,  rivers,  bays,  at  last  again  reach  the 
source  of  its  origin.  These  disturbances  and 
changes  we  call  Energy,  Force,  Motion — ^but 
they  are  but  surface  manifestations,  and  the 
Great  Ocean  is  serene  in  its  depths,  and,  in 
reality,  is  unchanged  and  undisturbed. 

184 


THE  EIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

This,  friends,  is  that  which  the  writer  asks 
you  to  accept  in  the  place  of  Aristotle's  Ether. 
Is  it  a  worthy  exchange? 

We  have  seen  that  the  Attraction  of  Gravita- 
tion was  different  from  any  other  so-called 
form  of  Force  and  Energy — both  in  its  opera- 
tions and  laws,  as  well  as  in  its  constancy  and 
self-support.  And  that  it  was  different  from 
the  other  forms  of  Attraction  such  as  Cohesion, 
Chemical  Affinity,  etc.  And,  so  we  must  con- 
sider it  as  more  than  a  mere  ^*  Emotional  Ex- 
citement'' in  the  Mind  of  the  Particle — that 
bubble  on  the  surface  of  the  Ocean.  And  it 
must  be  different  from  the  special  forms  of  At- 
traction manifested  by  the  Atom  and  Molecule. 
It  must  be  a  simpler,  more  basic,  and  yet  a  more 
constant  and  permanent  thing.  It  must  exist 
before  and  after  ** Excitement;  Vibration;  Co- 
hesion; and  Chemical  Affinity."  It  must  be  the 
MotUer  of  the  Forces. 

Let  us  imagine  the  Cosmic  Mind  as  a  great 
body  of  Something  filling  Space,  instead  of  as 
the  surface  of  the  Ocean,  which  figure  we  used 
just  now — either  figure  is  equally  correct.  This 
great  Cosmic  Mind  is  to  be  thought  of  as  fill- 
ing Space,  and  containing  within  its  volume 
(Oh,  for  a  better  word!)  countless  worlds,  and 
suns,  as  well  as  smaller  bodies  of  Substance. 

185 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

These  suns  and  world,  and  bodies  are  appar- 
ently free  and  unconnected,  floating  in  this 
great  volume  of  Mind.  But  they  are  not  free 
and  unconnected — they  are  linked  together  by 
a  web  of  lines  of  Gravitation.  Each  body  of 
Substance  has  a  line  reaching  out  in  a  con- 
tinuous direction,  and  connecting  it  with  an- 
other body.  Each  body  has  one  of  such  lines 
connecting  it  with  each  particular  *  *  other  body. ' ' 
Consequently,  each  body  has  countless  lines 
reaching  out  from  it;  some  slender,  and  some 
thick, — the  thickness  depending  upon  the  ratio 
of  distances  maintained  by,  and  relative  sizes 
of,  the  particular  bodies  that  it  connects.  This 
system  of  ^* lines''  form  a  great  net-work  of  con- 
nections in  the  volume  of  Mind,  crossing  each 
other  at  countless  points  (but  not  interfering 
with  each  other.)  And  although  the  number 
may  be  said  to  be  ** countless,''  still  these  lines 
do  not  begin  to  cover  the  entire  dimensions  of 
Space,  or  of  the  Mind  that  fills  it.  There  are 
great  areas  of  Space  entirely  untouched  by 
these  lines.  If  one  could  see  the  system  of  lines, 
it  probably  would  appear  as  a  sheared  off  sec- 
tion of  a  great  spider's  web,  with  lines  in  all 
directions,  but  with  'Aplenty  of  room"  between 
the  lines.    Perhaps  these  lines  converge  to  a 

common  centre,  and  that  centre  may  be / 

But  this  is  transcendental   dreaming — let  us 

186 


I 


THE  RIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

proceed  with  our  consideration  of  the  use  of 
these  lines. 

It  is  to  be  understood,  of  course,  that  these 
** lines''  are  not  material  lines — ^not  made  of 
Substance — but  rather,  ^^conditions''  in  the  Cos- 
mic Mind.  Not  Thought-waves  arising  from 
the  Excitement  of  Particles,  but  Something 
more  basic,  simpler,  and  more  permanent.  Let 
us  look  closer  and  we  will  see  that  the  great 
lines  of  Gravitation  radiating  from,  and  con- 
necting world  with  world — sun  with  planet — 
are  really  cables  composed  of  much  smaller 
lines,  the  finest  strands  of  which  are  seen  to 
emanate  from  each  Corpuscle  or  Particle  of 
Substance — the  '*line"  of  Gravitation  reaching 
from  the  Earth  to  the  Sun  being  composed  of 
a  mass  of  tiny  strands  which  connect  each  Par- 
ticle of  one  body  with  each  Particle  of  the  other. 
The  last  analysis  shows  us  that  each  Particle 
is  connected  with  every  other  Particle  in  the 
Universe  by  a  line  of  Attraction. 

These  ''Lines  of  Attraction'^  are  what  we  call 
Gravitation — purely  Mental  in  nature — ^Lines 
of  Mind-Principle  in  the  great  volume  of  mind. 

These  lines  of  Gravitation  must  have  existed 
from  the  creation  of  the  Particle,  and  the  con- 
nection between  Particle  and  Particles  must 
have  existed  from  the  beginning,  if  beginning 
there  was.     The  Particles  may  have  changed 

187 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

their  positions  and  relations  in  the  Universe, 
but  the  lines  have  never  been  broken.  Whether 
the  Particle  existed  as  a  free  Corpuscle — 
whether  combined  as  Atom  or  Molecule — 
whether  part  of  this  world  or  sun  or  planet,  or 
that  one  countless  millions  of  miles  removed — 
it  mattered  not.  The  Line  of  Gravitation 
always  was  there,  between  that  Particle  and 
every  other  Particle.  Distance  extended  and 
thinned  the  line,  or  the  reverse,  as  the  case 
might  be — but  it  was  there,  always.  Obstacles 
proved  no  hindrance  to  passage,  for  the  lines 
passed  through  the  obstacle.  Can  it  not  be 
seen  that  here  is  the  secret  of  the  fact  that  no 
**time''  is  required  for  the  passage  of  Gravita- 
tion— it  apparently  traveling  instantaneously, 
whereas,  in  fact,  it  does  not  ** travel"  at  all. 
And  does  not  seem  that  this  theory  also  explains 
why  no  medium  is  required  for  the  ** travel' ' 
of  Gravitation"?  And  does  it  not  explain  why 
Gravitation  is  not  affected  in  its  '* passage"  by 
intervening  bodies?  Gravitation  does  not 
** travel"  or  '*pass" — it  remains  constant,  and 
ever  present  between  the  articles,  varying  in 
degree  as  the  distance  between  the  Particles  is 
increased,  and  vice-versa;  and  increasing  and 
decreasing  in  effect,  according  to  the  number 
of  Particles  combining  their  lines  of  Attraction, 
as  in  the  case  of  Atom,  Molecule,  Mass,  World. 

188 


THE  RIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

Gravitation  is  a  Mental  Connection  or  Bond 
uniting  the  Mind  in  the  several  Particles,  rather 
than  their  Substance  or  Material. 

Along  these  lines  of  Gravitation  pass  the 
** Thought-waves,'^  resulting  from  the  Excite- 
ment of  the  Particles — these  fleeting,  changing, 
inconstant  waves  of  Emotion — ^how  different 
they  are  from  the  changeless,  constant  ex- 
hibition of  Gravitation.  And  along  these  same 
lines — ^when  shortened  by  close  contact,  travel 
the  impulses  of  Cohesion  and  Chemical  AflSnity. 
Gravitation  not  only  performs  its  own  work, 
but  also  acts  as  a  *' common-carrier'*  for  the 
waves  of  Desire-Force,  and  the  Thought-waves 
of  Excitement  of  the  Particles,  manifesting  as 
Attractive  Energy,  and  Radiant  Energy,  re- 
spectively. 

The  writer  asks  you  to  remember,  particu- 
larly, that  while  the  Desire-waves  of  the  Par- 
ticles,— and  their  Thought-waves  of  Excite- 
ment— are  changeable,  disconnected,  and  incon- 
constant;  the  Line  of  Gravitation  is  never 
broken,  and  could  not  be  unless  the  Particle  of 
Substance  was  swept  out  of  existence,  in  which 
case  the  balance  of  the  Universe  would  be  over- 
turned, and  chaos  would  result.  The  Divine 
Plan  is  perfect  to  the  finest  detail — every  Par- 
ticle is  needed — is  known — ^is  counted — and  used 
in  the  Plan.    And  Gravitation  is  the  plainest 

189 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

evidence  of  the  REALITY  of  The  Infinite  that 
is  afforded  us.  In  it  we  see  the  actual  ma- 
chinery of  The  Infinite,  No  wonder  that  great 
thinkers  have  bowed  their  heads  reverently  be- 
fore its  Power  and  Awf  nlness,  when  their  minds 
have  finally  grasped  its  import.  Verily  the 
sparrow's  fall  is  noted,  and  known,  as  the  Bibli- 
cal writer  has  recorded,  for  the  fall  is  in 
obedience  to  that  great  Law  that  holds  the  Par- 
ticles in  their  places — that  makes  possible  the 
whirl  of  worlds,  and  the  existence  of  Solar  Sys- 
tems— that,  indeed,  makes  possible  the  Forms 
of  Life  as  we  know  them — that  Something  that 
forever  and  ever  has,  and  will,  silently,  cease- 
lessly, untiringly,  and  without  emotion,  fulfilled 
its  work  and  destiny— GRAVITATION. 

The  Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought  also  holds 
that  in  addition  to  the  existence  of  the  Cosmic 
Mind,  or  Ocean  of  Mind-principle — and  the 
Lines  of  Attraction  that  run  through  it,  each 
particle  has  its  Mental  Atmosphere,  or  Aura. 
The  Aura  is  an  Atmosphere  of  Mind  that  sur- 
rounds the  Particle — and  also  the  larger  bodies 
— and  also  living  forms  higher  in  the  scale.  This 
Aura  is  merely  an  extension  of  the  bit  of  Mind 
that  is  segregated  or  apparent  separated  from 
the  Cosmic  Mind,  for  use  by  the  individual  Par- 
ticle, Mass,  or  Creature.      Through,  and  by 

190 


THE  KIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHIN: 


or  TME     "^ 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 


means  of  this  Aura  the  Particle  takes  cogniz- 
ance of  the  approach  and  nature  of  the  other 
Particles  in  its  vicinity.  The  same  rule  holds 
good  in  the  case  of  the  Creatures,  including 
Man,  as  we  shall  see  in  a  later  chapter.  The 
fact  is  mentioned  here,  merely  in  order  to  con- 
nect the  several  manifestation  of  Mental  Phe- 
nomena mentioned  in  the  several  parts  of  this 
book. 


Some  may  object  to  the  Theory  of  the  Lines 
of  Gravitation  being  the  only  *^ carriers''  of  the 
Energy  of  the  Sun,  as  being  contrary  to  the  con- 
ception of  Science  that  the  Sun  radiates  Energy 
in  all  directions  equally,  just  as  does  a  piece  of 
hot  iron,  or  a  lamp.  Answering  this  objection, 
the  writer  would  say  that  there  is  a  decided  dif- 
ference in  the  two  cases.  The  iron  or  lamp 
radiates  its  heat  and  light  to  the  particles  of  the 
surrounding  air  and  other  Substance  in  close 
distance,  the  ** lines''  being  very  close  together, 
— so  close  in  fact  that  they  seem  to  be  contin- 
uous and  having  no  space  between  them,  at  least 
no  Space  suflSciently  large  to  be  detected  by  the 
eye  of  Man,  or  his  instruments.  But  with  the 
Sun  the  case  is  different,  for  the  distances  are 
greater  and  the  lines  spread  apart  as  the  dis- 
tance is  increased.  Draw  a  diagram  of  many 
fine  rays  emanating  from  a  central  point,  and 

191 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

you  will  have  the  idea  at  once.  If  Space  were 
filled  with  Substance,  just  as  is  the  Atmosphere 
of  the  Earth — the  Air,  is  meant  of  course — then 
indeed  would  the  lines  practically  be  joined  to- 
gether, but  as  Space  between  the  worlds  is 
almost  devoid  of  Substance,  the  lines  between 
the  Sun  and  the  other  worlds,  and  planets, 
spread  out  rapidly  as  the  distance  from  the  Sun 
increases. 

To  show  how  this  objection  is  really  an  addi- 
tional proof  of  the  Theory  the  writer  begs  to  call 
your  attention  to  the  fact  that  according  to  the 
calculations  of  the  physicists  in  Science,  the 
Sun's  energy  would  have  been  exhausted  in  20,- 
000,000  years,  granting  that  it  was  dispersed 
equally  in  all  directions  during  that  time.  But, 
note  this,  Science  in  its  other  branches,  namely 
in  Geology,  etc.,  holds  that  the  Sun  already  has 
been  throwing  out  energy  for  500,000,000  or 
more  years,  and  seems  able  to  stand  the  strain 
for  many  millions  of  years  more.  Thus  Science 
is  arrayed  against  Science.  Does  not  this 
Theory  harmonize  the  two,  by  showing  that  the 
Sun  does  not  emanate  Energy  in  all  directions, 
equally,  and  at  all  times — but,  on  the  contrary 
radiates  Energy  only  along  the  lines  of  Gravita- 
tion, and  in  proportion  to  the  relative  distances 
and  sizes  of  the  bodies  to  whom  such  Energy  is 
radiated? 

192 


THE  RIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

The  writer  need  scarcely  state  that  in  the 
short  space  at  his  disposal,  in  the  pages  of  this 
book,  he  has  been  able  merely  to  outline  his 
Theory  of  Dynamic  Force,  as  applied  to  the  In- 
organic World.  The  patience  of  the  average 
reader  has  limits — and  he  must  pass  on  to  other 
features  of  the  workings  of  the  theory,  namely 
the  Mental  Life  of  Man,  in  which  the  same  laws 
are  manifested.  But,  he  feels  that  those  inter- 
ested in  the  phases  of  the  subject  touched  upon, 
may  explain  for  themselves  the  missing  details 
by  reference  to  the  teachings  of  Modern  Science 
on  the  subjects  of  Physics,  remembering, 
always,  to  substitute  the  Theory  of  Dynamic 
Thought  for  the  *^  Ether  *'  theory  that  Modern 
Science  borrows  from  Aristotle  as  a  temporary 
** makeshift.''  The  writer  believes  that  this 
Theory  will  account  for  many  of  the  missing 
links  in  Physics — a  broad  statement,  he  knows, 
and  one  either  extremely  impudent  or  superbly 
confident,  according  to  the  view-point  of  the 
critic. 

The  writer  may  be  able  to  throw  a  little  addi- 
tional light,  probably,  upon  the  question  of  the 
relation  between  Gravitation,  and  the  Excite- 
ment-waves of  Eadiant  Energy.  Without  at- 
tempting to  go  into  details,  he  wishes  to  suggest 
that  in  view  of  the  fact  that  the  Particles  are 

193 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

connected  by  the  ** Lines  of  Gravitation,"  any 
great,  extended,  and  rapid  disturbance  of  a 
number  of  Particles  would  cause  a  series  of  un- 
dulating or  wave-like  movements  in  the  ** lines,'' 
which  might  be  spoken  of  as  waves  of  **  Agita- 
tion or  Unrest''  in  the  Lines  of  Gravitation. 
This  Agitation,  or  Unrest,  of  course,  would  be 
'thus  communicated  to  all  other  Particles  to- 
ward whom  lines  extended,  the  intensity  or 
effect  of  such  Agitation  or  Unrest  depending 
upon  the  relative  distances,  and  the  number  of 
Particles  involved.  We  may  easily  imagine 
how  the  intense  and  high  rate  of  vibration 
among  the  Particles  of  the  Sun,  manifesting  as 
intense  Heat,  would  cause  a  like  high  degree  of 
Agitation  or  Unrest  among  the  Lines  of  Gravi- 
tation— the  '* lines"  dancing  backward  and  for- 
war;  around  and  about;  following  the  move- 
ments of  the  Particles,  and  thus  producing 
'* waves"  of  Gravitational  Agitation  and  Un- 
xest,  which  when  communicated  to  the  Particles 
of  the  Earth,  would  produce  a  similar  Excite- 
ment among  the  Particles  of  the  latter.  In  the 
same  way  the  ** Sun-spots,"  and  consequent 
terrestial  electrical  disturbance  may  be  ex- 
plained. 

While  not  absolutely  tying  himself  fo  this 
particular  conception  of  the  details  of  the  work- 
ings of  the  law,  the  writer  feels  free  to  say  that 

194 


THE  EIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

he  considers  it  a  very  reasonable  idea,  and  one 
that  in  all  probability  will  be  found  to  come 
nearer  to  explaining  the  phenomena,  than  any 
other  hypothesis.  It  certainly  coincides  with 
the  **undulatory  wave'^  theory  of  Science.  The 
idea  is  but  crudely  expressed  here,  for  lack  of 
space,  it  being  impossible  to  attempt  to  go  into 
details — the  mere  mention  of  general  principles 
being  all  that  is  possible  at  this  time  and  place. 

And  now,  for  a  few  additional  words  on  the 
subject  of  our  theory  that  in  place  of  the  hypo- 
thetical Ether  of  Science — a  Substance  that  is 
not  Substance — there  exists  a  great  Ocean  of 
Cosmic  Mind.  The  idea  is  not  without  corob- 
orative  proof  in  the  direction  of  the  thought  of 
advanced  thinkers  even  among  the  ranks  of 
Science. 

While  Science  has  accustomed  the  public  to 
the  idea  that  in  the  Universal  Ether  might  be 
found  the  origin  of  Matter — the  essence  of 
Energy— the  secret  of  Motion — it  has  not  spoken 
of  *^Mind,''  in  connection  with  this  Universal 
Something.  But  the  idea  is  not  altogether  new, 
and  some  daring  Scientific  thinkers  have  placed 
themselves  on  record  regarding  same.  Let  us 
quote  from  a  few  of  them — it  will  make  smoother 
our  path. 

Edward  Drinker  Cope,  in  several  of  his  writ- 

195 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

ings,  hinted  at  the  idea  that  the  basis  of  Life  and 
Consciousness  lay  bach  of  tkeAtoms,  and  might 
be  found  in  the  Universal  Ether, 

Dolbear  says:  ''Possibly  the  Ether  may  be 
the  medium  through  which  Mind  and  Matter 
react,'* 

Hemstreet  says:  ''Mind  in  the  Ether  is  no 
more  unnatural  than  Mind  in  flesh  and  bloody 

Stockwell  says :  **The  Ether  is  coming  to  be 
apprehended  as  an  immaterial,  snperphysical 
substance,  filling  all  space,  carrying  in  its  in- 
finite throbbing  bosom  the  specks  of  aggregated 
dynamic  force  called  worlds.  It  embodies  the 
ultimate  spiritual  principle,  and  represents  the 
unity  of  those  forces  and  energies  from  which 
spring,  as  their  source,  all  phenomena,  physical, 
mental  and  spiritual,  as  they  are  known  to  man." 

Dolbear  speaks  of  the  Ether  as  a  substance, 
which,  besides  the  function  of  energy  and  mo- 
tion, has  other  inherent  properties  "out  of 
which  could  emerge,  under  proper  circum- 
stances, other  phenomena,  such  as  life,  or  mind 
or  whatever  may  be  in  the  substratum/' 

Newton  spoke  of  it  as  a  "subtle  spirit,  or  im- 
material substance/'  Dolbear  says:  **The 
Ether — the  properties  of  which  we  vainly  strive 
to  interpret  in  the  terms  of  Matter,  the  undis- 
covered properties  of  which  ought  to  warn  every 
one  against  the  danger  of  strongly  asserting 

196 


I 


THE  RIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHJN2 

what  is  possible  and  what  is  impossible  in  the 
nature  of  things." 

Stockwell  says :  *  *  That  the  Ether  is  not  Mat- 
ter in  any  of  its  forms,  practically  all  scientists 
are  agreed.  Dolbear,  again,  says :  If  the  Ether 
that  fills  all  space  is  not  atomic  in  structure,  pre- 
sents no  friction  to  bodies  moving  through  it, 
and  is  not  subject  to  the  law  of  gravitation,  it 
does  not  seem  proper  to  call  it  Matter,  One 
might  speak  of  it  as  a  substance  if  he  wants  an- 
other name  for  it.  As  for  myself,  I  make  a 
sharp  distinction  between  the  Ether  and  Mat- 
ter, and  feel  somewhat  confused  to  hear  one 
speak  of  the  Ether  as  Matter.'' 

And  yet,  in  spite  of  the  above  expressions,  no 
Scientist  has  dared  to  say  in  plain  words  that 
the  Ether,  or  whatever  took  the  place  of  the 
Ether,  must  be  Mind,  although  several  seem  to 
be  on  the  verge  of  the  declaration,  but  ap- 
parently afraid  to  voice  their  thought. 

In  view  of  what  we  have  seen  in  our  considera- 
tion of  the  facts  and  principles  advanced  in  this 
chapter,  we  are  invited  to  consider  the  follow- 
ing two  Suplemental  Propositions : 

Supplemental  Proposition  III. — Connecting 
each  Particle  of  Substance  with  each  and  every 
other  Particle  of  Substance,  there  exists  **  lines" 
of  Mental  Connection,  the  *^ thickness'*  of  ivhich 

197 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

depends  upon  the  distance  between  the  two  par- 
ticles, decreasing  in  proportion  as  the  distance 
is  increased.  These  ^^ lines' '  may  be  considered 
as  *^ conditions''  of  the  great  Ocean  of  Cosmic 
Mind  ivhich  pervades  and  fills  all  Space,  includ- 
ing the  essence  or  inner  being  of  the  Particles  of 
Substance,  as  well  as  the  space  between  the  said 
Particles,  These  ** lines"  are  the  ** Lines  of 
Gravitation,"  by  and  over  ivhich  the  phenome- 
non of  Gravitation  is  manifested.  These  Lines 
of  Gravitation  have  always  existed  between  each 
Particle  and  every  other  Particle,  and  have  per- 
sisted continuously  and  constantly,  throughout 
all  the  changes  of  condition,  and  position,  and 
relation,  that  the  Particles  have  undergone. 
There  is  no  '^passage"  or  ** transmission"  of 
Energy  or  Force  of  Gravitation  over  these 
lines,  or  any  other  channel,  but,  on  the  contrary 
the  Energy  or  Force  of  Gravitation  is  a  con- 
stant and  continuous  Mental  Connection  or  Bond 
existing  between  the  Mind  of  the  Particles, 
rather  than  between  their  Substance  or  Ma- 
terial. 

Supplemental  Proposition  IV. — The  Lines  of 
Gravitation,  mentioned  in  the  preceding  propo- 
sition, are  the  medium  over  which  travel,  or  are 
transmitted  the  *' Thought-waves"  resulting 
from  the  Excitement  of  the  Particles,  and  by 
which  waves  the  ''Mental  States"    are   com- 

198 


i 


THE  EIDDLE  OF  THE  SPHINX 

municated  or  transmitted.  The  same  medium 
transmits  or  carries  the  Mental  Force  of  At- 
traction— Cohesion,  Chemical  Affinity,  etc.,  evi- 
dencing in  the  relation  of  the  Particles  to  each 
other.  Thus  Gravitation  not  only  performs  its 
own  work,  but  also  acts  as  a  '^common  carrier*' 
for  the  *' waves  of  Excitement,"  manifesting  as 
Radiant  Energy;  and  the  waves  of  Desire-Force, 
manifesting  as  Attractive  Energy. 

And  here,  the  writer  rests  his  case  in  the 
action  in  the  Forum  of  Advanced  Thought,  en- 
titled ^'The  Theory  of  Dynamic  Thought  vs.  The 
Theory  of  Aristotle's  Ether/'  in  which  he  ap- 
pears for  the  Plaintiff.  He  begs  that  you,  the 
members  of  the  jury,  will  give  to  the  evidence, 
and  argument,  due  consideration,  to  the  end  that 
you  may  render  a  just  verdict. 


199 


CHAPTER  XIV 

THE   MYSTEEY   OP   MIND 

^T^  HE  writer,  in  this  book,  has  treated  the  two 
-*'  manifestations  of  Life,  viz:,  Mind  and  Sub- 
stance, as  if  they  were  separate  things,  although 
he  has  hinted  at  his  belief  that  Substance,  at  the 
last,  might  be  found  to  emanate  from  Mind,  and 
be  but  a  cruder  form  of  its  expression.  The 
better  way  to  express  the  thought  would  be  to 
say  that  he  believes  that  both  Substance,  and 
Mind  as  we  know  it,  are  but  expressions  of  a 
form  of  Mind  as  much  higher  than  that  which 
we  know  as  Mind,  as  the  latter  is  higher  than 
Substance.  But  he  does  not  intend  to  follow 
up  this  belief,  in  this  book,  as  the  field  of  the 
work  lies  along  other  lines.  The  idea  is  men- 
tioned here,  merely  for  the  purpose  of  giving  a 
clew  to  those  who  might  be  interested  in  the 
conclusions  of  the  writer,  regarding  this  more 
remote  regions  of  the  general  subject. 

The  writer  agrees  with  the  Ancient  Occult 
Teachings  regarding  the  existence  of  The  Cos- 
mic Mind,  as  he  has  stated  in  the  last  chapter. 

200 


THE  MYSTEEY  OF  MIND. 

This  Cosmic  Mind,  he  believes,  is  independent 
of  Substance,  in  fact  it  is  the  Mother  of  Sub- 
stance, and  its  twin-brother.  Mind  as  we  know  it. 

Mind,  as  we  know  it,  and  Substance  are 
always  found  in  connection  with  other.  It  is 
true  that  the  form  of  Substance,  used  by  Mind 
as  its  body,  may  be  far  finer  than  the  rarest 
vapor  that  we  know,  but  it  is  Substance  never- 
theless. The  working  of  the  Great  Plan  of  the 
Universe  seems  to  require  that  Mind  shall 
always  have  a  body  with  which  to  work,  and 
this  rule  applies  not  only  in  the  case  of  the 
densest  form  of  Substance  and  the  Mind-prin- 
ciple manifesting  through  it,  but  also  in  the  case 
of  the  highest  manifestation  of  Mind,  as  we 
know  it,  which  requires  a  body  through  which 
to  manifest. 

This  constant  combination  of  Mind  and  Sub- 
stance— the  fact  that  no  Substance  has  been 
found  without  at  least  a  trace  of  Mind,  and  no 
Mind  except  in  relation  to  and  combination  with 
Substance,  has  led  many  scientific  thinkers  to 
accept  the  Materialistic  idea  that  Mind  was  but 
a  property  of  Substance,  or  a  quality  thereof. 
Of  course,  these  philosophers  and  thinkers  have 
had  to  admit  that  they  could  form  no  idea  of  the 
real  nature  of  Mind,  and  could  not  conceive  how 
Substance  really  could  ** think,"  but  they  found 
the  Materialistic  idea  a  simpler  one  that  its 

201 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

opposite,  and  so  they  fell  into  it.  Notwithstand- 
ing the  fact  that  there  was  always  a  Something 
Within  that  would  cry  ** Pshaw!''  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  argument  or  illustration,  these 
men  have  thought  it  reasonable  to  believe  that 
there  was  no  such  thing  as  Mind,  except  as  a 
result  of  *  *  irritation  of  tissue, ' '  etc.  But,  never- 
theless, there  is  always  a  Something  in  us  that, 
in  spite  of  argument,  keeps  crying  like  a  child, 
"  'taint  so!"  And,  wonderful  to  relate,  we 
heed  the  little  voice. 

This  Materialistic  theory  is  a  curious  reversal 
of  the  facts  of  the  case.  Even  the  very  conclu- 
sions and  reasoning  of  these  thinkers  is  made 
possible  only  by  the  existence  of  that  Mind 
which  they  would  deny.  The  human  reason  is 
incapable  of  ** explaining''  the  inner  operation 
of  the  Mind,  upon  a  strictly  and  purely  physical 
basis.  Tyndall,  the  great  English  scientist, 
truthfully  said,  'Hhe  passage  from  the  physics 
of  the  hrain,  to  the  corresponding  facts  of  con- 
sciousness, is  unthinkable:  Granted  that  a 
definite  thought  and  a  definite  molecular  action 
of  the  hrain  occur  simultaneously,  we  do  not  pos- 
sess the  intellectual  organ,  nor  apparently  any 
rudiment  of  the  organ,  which  would  enable  us  to 
pass  by  a  process  of  reasoning  from  the  one 
phenomenon  to  the  other." 

The  Materialist  is  prone  to  an  attempt  to  rout 
202 


THE  MYSTERY  OF  MIND. 

the  advocates  of  **Mind''  with  a  demand  for  an 
answer  to  the  question,  **What  is  Mind!'*  The 
best  answer  to  that  question  lies  along  the  pro- 
verbial Irishman's  lines  of  answering  a  ques- 
tion by  asking  another  one,  resulting  in  the 
*^ answering  question,"  **  What  is  Matter?"  As 
a  fact,  the  human  reason  is  unable  to  give  an 
intelligent  answer  to  either  question,  and  the 
best  opinion  seems  to  be  to  consider  them  as 
but  two  aspects  of  Something,  the  real  origin 
of  which  lies  in  Something  Higher,  of  which 
both  are  aspects  or  forms  of  expression. 

The  Occult  Teaching,  with  which  the  writer 
agrees,  is  that  the  **Mind"  inherent  in  any  por- 
tion of  substance,  from  the  Corpuscle  up  to  the 
Brain  of  Man,  is  but  a  segregated  (or  ap- 
parently separated)  portion  of  the  Universal 
Mind-principle,  or  Cosmic  Mind.  This  frag- 
ment of  Mind  is  always  connected  with  Sub- 
stance, and,  in  fact,  it  is  believed  that  it  is  sep- 
arated from  the  Universal  Mind,  and  the  other 
Separate  Minds  by  a  **film"  of  the  rarest  Sub- 
stance, so  fine  as  to  be  scarcely  distinguishable 
from  Mind.  This  separation  is  not  a  total  sep- 
aration, however,  for  the  fragment  of  Mind  is 
in  connection  with  all  other  fragments  of  Mind, 
by  ** mental  filaments,"  and  besides  is  never  out 
of  touch  with  the  Cosmic  Mind. 

203 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

But,  comparatively,  the  fragment  of  Mind  is 
apart  from  the  rest,  and  we  must  consider  it  in 
this  way,  at  least  for  the  purpose  of  study,  con- 
sideration, and  illustration.  It  is  like  a  drop  in 
the  Ocean  of  Mind,  although  connected,  in  a 
way,  with  every  other  drop,  and  the  Ocean  itself. 

The  individual  Mind  is  not  closely  confined 
within  the  Substance  in  which  it  abides,  but  ex- 
tends beyond  the  physical  limits  of  the  Sub- 
stance, sometimes  to  a  quite  considerable  dis- 
tance. The  Aura,  or  egg-shaped  projection  or 
emanation  of  Mind,  surrounding  each  Particle 
and  each  Individual,  is  an  instance  of  this.  In 
addition  to  the  Aura,  there  is  possibly  an  exten- 
sion of  Mind  to  a  considerable  distance  beyond 
the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  physical  limits,  the 
connection,  however,  never  being  broken  during 
the  *'life''  term. 

Mental  influence  at  a  distance,  however,  does 
not  always  require  the  above  mentioned  projec- 
tion of  the  Mind.  Thought- waves  often  answer 
the  purpose,  and,  besides,  there  is  such  a  thing 
as  the  imparting  of  Mental  vibrations  to  the 
small  particles  of  Substances  with  which  the 
atmosphere  is  filled,  which  vibrations  continue 
for  quite  a  time,  often  for  a  long  period  after 
the  presence  of  the  individual  producing  them. 
These  matters  shall  be  discussed  in  later  chap- 
ters of  this  book. 

204 


THE  MYSTERY  OF  MIND. 

The  Mind  of  Man  is  a  far  more  complex 
thing  that  is  generally  imagined  by  the  average 
man.  Not  only  in  its  varied  manifestation  of 
consciousness,  but  its  great  region  of  **below- 
consciousness ' '  or  Infra  Consciousness,  as  it  is 
called.  It  shall  be  the  purpose  of  the  sequel  to 
this  book  (now  in  preparation)  which  will  be 
entitled  **The  Wonders  of  the  Mind,''  to  de- 
scribe these  inner  workings,  and  to  point  ojit 
methods  of  utilizing  the  same. 

Our  next  chapter,  entitled  **The  Finer  Forces 
of  the  Mind,"  will  lead  us  into  this  field. 


205 


CHAPTER  XV. 

THE  FINER  FORCES  OF  THE  MIND. 

Tr  was  the  writer's  original  intention  to  close 
^  the  book  with  the  chapter  in  which  he 
brought  to  a  close  his  argument,  and  presen- 
tation of  the  case  of  ** Dynamic  Thought."  The 
book  was  written  for  the  purpose  of  demon- 
strating that  Theory,  and  it  naturally  should 
have  closed  there.  The  writer  has  in  simul- 
taneous course  of  preparation  a  companion 
book,  entitled  ^'The  Wonders  of  The  Mind,"  in 
which,  in  addition  to  information  and  instruc- 
tion regarding  the  latent  powers  and  hidden 
regions  of  the  mind — including  an  investigation 
of  the  Infra-conscious  and  Ultra-conscious 
Eegions;  Automatic  Thinking;  Occult  Systems 
of  Mentation;  Mental  Development,  and  Un- 
foldment,  etc. — ^he  purposes  taking  up  the  sub- 
ject of  ** Dynamic  Thought,''  from  the  Mental 
Plane  of  Man.  And  he  thought  it  better  to  keep 
the  two  branches  of  the  subject  separate  and 
apart. 

But,  notwithstanding  the  above  facts,  he  feels 
that  he  cannot  close  the  present  book — the  con- 

206 


THE  FINER  FORCES  OF  THE  MIND 

sideration  of  the  present  phase  of  the  subject, 
without  at  least  a  passing  reference  to  the  fact 
that  ** Dynamic  Thought''  is  fully  operative  on 
the  Plane  of  Human  Mentation,  as  on  the  Plane 
of  Atomic  Mentation.  In  fact,  Man  has  the 
same  power,  potentially,  that  is  possessed  by 
the  Atom,  only  refined  to  a  degree  correspond- 
ing to  the  development  of  Man  as  compared  to 
that  of  the  Atom.  The  Power  is  raised  to  a 
higher  Plane  of  Mentation,  but  is  fully  opera- 
tive. 

Just  as  the  body  of  Man  contains  physical  life 
corresponding  with  the  different  stages  of  lower 
physical  life,  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal — 
for  instance,  the  mineral-like  bones,  and  the 
mineral  salts  in  the  system;  the  plant-like  life 
and  work  of  the  cells ;  and  the  animal-like  flesh, 
and  physical  life ;  in  addition  to  the  wonderful 
brain-structure  and  fine  brain  development, 
peculiar  to  Man — so  has  Man  the  lower  Mental 
Qualities  of  the  lower  life,  in  addition  to  his 
glorious  Human  Consciousness  that  is  reserved 
for  the  Highest  Form  of  Life  on  the  globe. 

In  his  Mental  regions,  man  has  the  power  of 
the  Atom  of  attracting  particles  of  Substance  to 
him,  that  he  may  combine  it  with  other  Sub- 
stances in  building  up  his  body — then  he  has  the 
plant-like  cell  mentation,  that  does  the  building- 
up  work,  and  repairs  wounds,  and  damaged 

207 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

parts,  etc. — then  he  has  the  animal  mentation 
evidencing  in  the  passions,  desires,  and  emo- 
tions of  the  purely  animal  nature,  and  which 
mentation,  by  the  way,  keeps  Man  busy  in  con- 
trolling by  means  of  his  higher  mental  faculties, 
that  are  God's  gift  to  Man,  and  are  not  pos- 
sessed by  the  animals.  But  all  this  will  form 
part  of  the  sequel,  ^'The  Wonders  of  The  Mind/' 
and  are  merely  mentioned  here  in  passing. 

And,  just  as  Man  is  enabled  to  use  elementary 
the  physical  qualities  that  he  finds  in  his  body,, 
and  to  turn  same  to  good  account  in  living  his 
human  life,  so  does  man,  consciously,  or  uncon- 
sciously, make. use  of  these  elementary  Mental 
powers  in  his  everyday  mental  life.  And  if  he 
but  realizes  what  a  conscious  use  of  these  facul- 
ties, guided  by  the  Human  Will,  will  do,  Man 
may  become  a  different  order  of  being.  This 
is  the  basis  of  the  Occult  Teachings,  and  the 
Mysteries  of  the  Ancients,  as  well  as  the  teach- 
ings of  the  modern  secret  esoteric  bodies  and 
societies,  sfich  as  the  *  *  Rosicrucians  "  and  *^  Her- 
metic Brotherhood, ' '  and  several  other  societies 
whose  names  are  not  known — the  real  societies 
are  referred  to,  not  the  brazen  imitations  that 
unscrupulous  men  are  holding  out  to  the  public 
as  the  original  orders,  membership  being  offered 
and  urged  for  the  consideration  of  a  few  dol- 
lars.   It  is  needless  to  say  that  membership  in 

208 


THE  FINEB  FORCES  OF  THE  MIND 

the  real  Occult  orders  is  never  urged,  and  cannot 
be  bought. 

But  to  return  to  the  subject — the  Individual 
Mind  of  Man  is  in  direct  touch,  not  only  with 
the  great  Cosmic  Mind,  but  also  with  the  Indi- 
vidual Mind  of  every  other  Man.  Just  as  the 
Particles  are  bound  by  lines  of  Attraction,  so 
are  the  Minds  of  Men  bound  together  by  lines 
of  Mind,  or  Mental  filaments.  And  just  as  spe- 
cial forms  of  Attraction  exist  between  the  Par- 
ticles, so  do  special  forms  of  Attraction  exist 
between  Men.  And  just  as  Particles  are  in- 
fluenced at  a  difference  by  other  Particles,  so 
are  Men  influenced  at  a  distance  by  other  Men. 
And  just  as  the  Particle  draws  toward  itself  that 
which  it  Desires,  so  do  Men  draw  toward  them- 
selves that  which  they  Desire.  And  just  as 
Mental-States  and  ^* Excitement*'  are  transmit- 
ted, or  communicated  from  Particle  to  Particle, 
so  are  Mnetal  States  or  ^^Excitemenf  trans^ 
mitted  or  communicated  from  Men  to  Men.  *^As 
Above  so  Beloiv — as  Beloiv  so  Above,''  says  the 
old  Occult  Maxim,  and  it  may  be  found  to  oper- 
ate on  every  plane. 

The  phenomena  of  Thought  Transference; 
Telepathy;  Telesthesia;  Mental  Projection; 
Suggestion;  Hypnotism,  Mesmerism,  etc.,  etc., 
may  be  explained  and  understood,  by  reason  of 
an  acquaintance  with  the  ''Theory  of  Dynamic 

209 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Thought/'  as  explained  in  this  book.  An  un- 
derstanding of  one  gives  you  the  key  to  the  other 
— for  the  Law  operates  precisely  the  same  on 
each  particular  plane.  If  the  reader  will  think 
over  this  statement,  and  then  apply  it  to  his  in- 
vestigations and  experiments,  he  will  find  that 
he  has  the  key  to  many  mysteries — the  loose  end 
of  a  mighty  ball  of  thread,  which  he  may  unwind 
at  his  leisure. 

Let  us  begin  by  a  consideration  of  the  process 
of  Thought-production  in  the  Human  Mind.  In 
this  way  we  may  arrive  at  a  clearer  idea  of  the 
Mental  Phenomena  known  as  Thought-Force; 
Mental  Power ;  Thought-waves ;  Thought-vibra- 
tions ;  Mind-transference ;  Mental  Influence,  etc. 
To  understand  these  things  we  must  begin  by 
understanding  the  Process  of  Thought-produc- 
tion. Here  is  found  the  Secret  of  the  phe- 
nomena named,  and  much  more. 

In  the  first  place,  while  the  Brain  is  the  Organ 
of  the  Mind — the  Instrument  that  the  Mind  uses 
in  producing  Thought,  still  the  Brain  does  not 
do  the  thinking,  nor  is  the  brain-matter  visible 
to  the  eye,  the  material  instrument  of  thinking- 
The  Brain  (and  other  portions  of  the  nervous 
systems,  including  the  *  kittle  brains"  or  gan- 
glia, found  in  various  parts  of  the  body)  is  com- 
posed of  a  certain  substance — a  fine  form  of 
Plasm,  which  however  is  but  the  ground-work 

210 


THE  FINER  FORCES  OF  THE  MIND 

of  foundation  for  finer  forms  of  Substance  used 
in  the  production  of  Thought.  Science  has  not 
discovered  this  finer  Substance,  for  it  is  not 
visible  to  the  eye,  or  to  the  finest  instruments, 
but  trained  Occulists  know  that  it  exists.  This 
fine  Substance  escapes  the  scalpel  and  miscros- 
cope  of  the  biologists  and  anatomists,  and,  con- 
sequently, their  search  for  ^  ^  Mind ' '  in  the  Brain 
is  futile.  There  is  something  more  than  ^  tis- 
sue to  be  irritated''  in  the  Brain.  But,  remem- 
ber, that  this  *^ something  more"  is  still  Sub- 
stance, and  not  Mind  itself. 

Thought  is  a  form  of  ^^ Excitement*'  in  this 
fine  brain-substance,  which  we  may  as  well  call 
Psycho-plasm,  from  the  two  Greek  words  mean- 
ing *^the  mind,"  and  **a  mold,  or  matrix,"  re- 
spectively— the  combined  word  meaning  the 
** mould  or  matrix  of  Mind,"  in  other  words  the 
material  Substance  used  by  the  Mind  in  which  to 
*^cast"  or  *'mold"  Thoughts. 

This  Excitement  in  the  Psychoplasm  mani- 
fests in  vibrations  of  its  particles — for,  like  all 
Substance,  it  has  ** particles."  All  scientists 
agree  that  in  the  process  of  thinking  there  is  an 
expenditure  of  Energy,  and  a  **using-up"  of 
material  Substance.  Just  how  this  is  effected, 
they  do  not  know,  but  their  experiments  have 
shown  that  there  is  Energy  manifested  and 
used,  and  also  Substance  consumed. 

211 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

The  secret  of  the  production  of  Thought  does 
not  lie  in  the  Brain  or  nervous  system,  which 
are  but  the  material  substratum  upon  which  the 
Mind  works,  and  which  it  uses  as  a  mold  or 
matrix  for  the  production  of  Thought.  Thought 
is  the  product  of  Mind  directing  Force  upon 
Substance  in  the  shape  of  Psychoplasm.  And 
Energy  is  manifested  in  the  production  of 
Thought  just  as  much  as  in  the  operation  of  the 
Law  of  Attraction,  or  Chemical  Action. 
"What  Force  and  Energy!"  may  be  asked. 
The  answer  is  "Mental  Force!"  But  although 
the  answer  stares  them  right  in  the  face,  scien- 
tists deny  that  Mind  contains  Force  or  Energy 
within  itself,  and  persist  in  thinking  of  Force 
as  a  ''mechanical  thing,"  or  as  necessarily  de- 
rived from  the  common  forms  of  Energy,  such 
as  Heat,  Light  or  Electricity.  They  ignore  the 
fact  that  Mind  has  a  Finer  Force  which  it  uses 
to  perform  its  work. 

How  do  the  Atoms  attract  each  other  and 
move  together?  There  is  an  evidence  of  Force 
and  Energy  here  that  is  not  Heat,  Light  or  Elec- 
tricity— ^what  is  it?  When  a  man  wishes  to 
close  his  hand,  he  Wills  that  it  be  closed,  and 
sends  a  current  of  this  Finer  Force  of  the  Mind 
along  the  nerve  to  the  muscle,  and  the  latter 
contracts  and  the  hand  is  closed.    A  similar 

212 


THE  FINER  FORCES  OF  THE  MIND 

process  is  used  in  every  muscular  action.  What 
is  the  Force  usedf 

Science  admits  the  existence  of  this  Force, 
and  calls  it  ^^ Nervous  Energy,''  or  ** Nerve 
Force/'  It  holds  that  it  must  be  ^^ something 
like  Electricity,  and  some  even  go  so  far  as  to 
say  that  it  is  Electricity.  They  base  their  ideas 
upon  the  fact  that  when  Electricity  is  applied 
to  the  muscle  of  living  or  dead  animals,  they 
contract  just  as  they  do  when  this  **  Nerve 
Force"  is  applied,  and  every  movement  of  the 
muscles  may  be  so  produced  by  Electricity, 
which  becomes  a  counterfeit  Nerve  Force. 
But,  here  is  the  point,  this  Force  cannot  be 
identical  with  Electricity,  for  none  of  the  ap- 
pliances for  registering  electric  currents  will 
register  it.  It  is  not  Electricity,  hut  is  some 
Finer  Force  of  the  Mind,  generated  in  the 
material  substratum  that  the  Mind  uses  as  a 
base  of  operation. 

This  Fine  Force  of  the  Mind  is  generated  in 
some  way  in  the  Brain  and  Nervous  System, 
by  action  upon  the  Psychoplasm.  The  Brain, 
or  brains  (for  Man  has  several  centres  worthy 
of  that  term)  are  like  great  dynamos  and  store- 
houses of  this  Force,  and  the  nerves  are  the 
wires  that  carry  it  to  all  parts  of  the  system. 
More  than  this,  the  nerves  have  been  found 
to  be  generators  of  Force,  also,  as  well  as  the 

213 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Brain.  Experiments  have  shown  that  the  sup- 
ply of  Force  in  a  nerve  vanishes  when  the  nerve 
is  used,  in  which  case  it  draws  upon  the  store- 
houses for  an  additional  supply. 

This  Fine  Force  of  the  Mind  is  really  the 
source  of  All  Energy,  for  as  we  have  shown  in 
previous  chapters,  all  Motion  arises  from  Men- 
tal Action,  and  this  form  of  Force  or  Energy 
is  the  primal  Force  or  Energy  produced  by  the 
Mind.  And  this  Force  is  in  operation  in  all 
forms  of  Life,  from  the  Atom  to  the  Man.  And 
not  only  may  it  be  used  by  the  Particle,  but 
Man,  also,  has  it  at  his  disposal. 

As  a  proof  that  Substance  is  *  ^used-up,''  and 
Energy  manifested  in  the  production  of 
Thought,  Science  points  to  the  fact  that  the 
temperature  of  a  nerve  rises  when  it  is  used, 
and  the  temperature  of  the  Brain  increases 
when  it  is  used  for  extended  Thought.  Sci- 
entists have  claimed,  and  advanced  a  mass  of 
proof  to  back  up  the  same,  that  Thought  was 
as  much  a  form  of  Energy  as  was  the  pulling 
of  a  train  of  cars,  and  was  attended  by  th«  pro- 
duction of  a  definite  amount  of  Heat,  resulting 
from  the  activity  of  the  fine  substance  of  the 
physical  extended  resistant  and  composite  sub- 
stratum. 

But,  Science  has  taken  all  this  to  mean  that 
Thought  and  Mind  were  purely  material  things, 

2U 


THE  FINER  FORCES  OF  THE  MIND 

and  properties  of  Matter.  It  has  claimed  that 
** Matter  Thinks/'  instead  of  that  Mind  uses 
the  Matter  or  Substance,  in  its  finer  forms,  as 
a  substratum  for  the  production  of  Thought. 
Buchner,  the  leader  of  the  purely  Materialistic 
school,  claims  positively  that  Thought  is  but 
the  product  of  Matter.  He  says:  **Is  it  not 
a  patent  fact,  obvious  to  all  but  the  wilfully 
blind  that  matter  does  think?  De  la  Mettrie 
made  merry  over  the  narrowness  of  the  mental- 
ists,  in  saying:  *When  people  ask  whether  mat- 
ter can  think,  it  is  as  though  they  asked 
whether  matter  can  strike  the  hours ! '  Matter, 
indeed,  as  such,  thinks  as  little  as  it  strikes  the 
hours ;  but  it  does  both,  when  brought  into  such 
conditions  that  thinking,  or  hour-striking  re- 
sults as  a  natural  action  or  performance." 

The  above  quoted  opinion  of  Buchner  shows 
how  narrow  and  one-sided  a  talented  man  may 
become  by  reason  of  shutting  out  all  other 
points  of  view,  and  seeing  only  one  phase  of 
a  subject.  The  example  of  the  ** hour-striking''  is 
a  poor  figure  for  the  Materialists,  for  although 
matter  does  strike  the  hours,  it  does  so  only 
when  wound  up  by  Man  under  direction  of  his 
Mind.  And  in  the  manufacture,  adjustment, 
and  winding  of  the  clock,  Mind  is  the  Cause  of 
the  Action.  And,  more  than  this,  the  very 
action  of  the  coiled  spring  that  is  the  immediate 

215 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

cause  of  the  striking,  results  from  the  mental 
effort  of  the  Particles  of  the  spring  endeavor- 
ing to  resume  their  accustomed  position,  under 
the  law  of  Elasticity,  as  explained  in  our  chap- 
ters on  Substance. 

Science  renders  valuable  service  in  showing 
us  the  details  of  the  *' mechanism"  of  Thought, 
but  it  will  never  really  explain  anything  unless 
it  assumes  the  existence  of  Mind,  back  of  and 
in  everything.  It  may  dissect  the  brain-cells, 
and  show  us  their  composition,  but  it  never 
will  find  Mind  under  the  scalpel,  or  in  the  scale 
or  test-tube.  Not  only  is  this  true,  but  it  can- 
not even  discover  the  fine  Psychoplasm  which 
is  used  in  the  production  of  Mind.  But  we 
may  make  use  of  its  investigations  regarding 
the  matter  of  Activity  of  Brain-substance  in 
the  process  of  Thought,  and  by  combining  them 
with  our  belief  regarding  the  existence  of  Mind 
we  may  form  a  complete  chain  of  reasoning, 
without  any  missing-links — these  missing-links 
appearing  both  in  the  case  of  the  *' no-mind'* 
philosophers,  and  the  **  no-matter '*  metaphy- 
sicians. 

This  theory  of  Mind  and  Substance  consid- 
ered as  the  two  aspects  of  Something  Higher, 
from  which  both  have  originated  or  emanated, 
will  come  to  be  regarded  as  the  only  '*  think- 
able'* proposition,  in  the  end.    And,  with  this 

216 


THE  FINER  FORCES  OF  THE  MIND 

idea  in  view,  we  may  use  the  facts  and  experi- 
ments of  the  Materialists,  while  smiling  at  their 
theories.  And,  with  but  a  slight  change  of 
words,  we  may  turn  against  them  their  own 
verbal  batteries.  In  this  way,  we  may  take 
Moleschott's  famous  statement:  ''Thought  is 
but  a  motion  of  Matter/^  and  render  it  in- 
telligible by  making  it  read  as  follows: 
''Thought  produces  Motion  in  Matter/^ 

This  Finer  Force  of  the  Mind  is  in  full  evi- 
dence to  those  who  look  for  it,  and  although  it 
may  not  be  registered  by  the  scales  or  instru- 
ments designed  to  register  the  coarser  grades 
of  Force,  still  it  is  registered  in  the  minds  of 
men  and  women,  and  in  the  actions  resulting 
from  their  thoughts.  These  living  registers  of 
the  Force  respond  readily  to  it, — and  every 
one  of  us  is  such  a  register.  Just  as  is  the 
Force  a  much  higher  grade  of  Energy  than  the 
forms  usually  considered  as  comprising  the  en- 
tire range  of  Energy,  so  are  the  instruments 
required  for  its  registration  much  higher  than 
those  used  to  determine  the  degrees  of  Heat, 
Light,  Electricity,  and  Magnetism.  It  may  be 
that  the  future  will  give  us  instruments  adapted 
for  the  purpose — in  fact  it  begins  to  look  even 
now  as  if  the  same  were  forthcoming.  But 
whether  we  have  such  mechanical  instruments, 
or  not,  the  living  instruments  give  us  a  sufiS- 

217 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

cient  proof  of  the  existence  of  the  Force,  and 
its  operation. 

Well — the  writer  still  finds  himself  unable  to 
bring  the  book  to  a  close.  He  added  this  chap- 
ter, to  show  that  the  property  of  Dynamic 
Thought  extended  to  the  highest  development 
of  Mind,  as  well  as  abiding  in  the  lowest.  And, 
now  that  he  has  ventured  upon  the  subject,  he 
finds  himself  impelled  to  give  you  a  few  in- 
stances of  the  workings  and  operations  of  that 
Law,  in  the  case  of  Human  Mental  Life.  And 
this  means  one  more  chapter — ^but  only  one,  re- 
member. The  book  must  come  to  an  end  some- 
time remember.  And,  so  we  will  pass  over  into 
another  chapter,  which  will  be  entitled, 
* '  Thought  in  Action. ' ' 


218 


CHAPTER  XVI 

THOUGHT  IN  ACTION 

1X7 ITHOUT  attempting  to  go  into  details,  or 
^^  to  enter  into  explanations,  the  writer 
purposes  taking  his  readers  on  a  flying  trip 
through  the  region  of  ** Thought  in  Action,*'  or 
**  Dynamic  Thought  in  Operation  in  Human 
Life.''  The  details  of  this  fascinating  region 
must  be  left  for  another  and  more  extended 
visit,  in  our  next  book  (before  mentioned) 
which  will  be  called  *^The  Wonders  of  The 
Mind,*'  But  he  thinks  that  even  this  flying  trip 
will  prove  of  interest  and  instruction. 

Let  us  start  with  a  hasty  look  at  Man  him- 
self. Not  to  speak  of  his  **  Seven  Planes  of 
Mind,"  which  belongs  to  the  next  visit,  we  find 
him  a  very  interesting  object.  Not  only  has  he 
a  physical  body,  apparent  to  our  senses,  but  he 
has  also  a  finer  or  ** astral  body,"  which  he  may 
use  (unconsciously,  or  consciously,  when  he 
learns  how)  for  little  excursions  away  from  the 
body,  during  his  lifetime.  This  Astral  Body  is 
composed   of   Substance   just   as   his   denser 

219 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

physical  body.  The  field  and  range  of  Sub- 
stance extends  far  beyond  the  powers  of  ordi- 
nary vision,  as  even  the  Materialists  must  ad- 
mit when  they  talk  of  ** Radiant  Matter," 
**Etherial  Substance,''  etc.  Then  he  has  cur- 
rents of  Fine  Force  coursing  through  his  nerv- 
ous system,  which  may  be  seen  by  those  pos- 
sessing ** Astral  Vision,''  if  the  teachings  of  the 
Occultists  be  true. 

Then  he,  like  the  Particle,  has  an  *'Aura"  or 
egg-shaped  projection  of  Mind  and  fine  par- 
ticles of  Psychoplasm,  which  has  been  thrown 
off  in  the  process  of  Thought,  and  which  clus- 
ters around  him,  producing  a  *^  Mental  Atmo- 
sphere," which  constantly  surrounds  him,  and 
makes  itself  **felt"  by  those  coming  in  his  pres- 
ence. Those  who  read  these  words  may  re- 
member, readily,  the  **feeling"  they  have  ex- 
perienced when  coming  in  contact  with  certain 
people — how  some  radiated  an  atmosphere  of 
cheerfulness,  brightness,  etc.,  while  others 
radiated  the  very  opposite.  Some  radiate  a 
feeling  of  energy,  activity,  etc.,  while  others 
manifest  just  the  reverse.  Many  likes  and  dis- 
likes between  people  meeting  for  the  first  time, 
arise  in  this  way,  each  finding  in  the  mental 
atmosphere  of  the  other,  some  inharmonious 
element.  These  radiations  are  perceived  by 
others  coming  into  their  range. 

220 


THOUGHT  IN  ACTION 

Occultists  tell  US  that  the  character  of  a 
man's  thought  vibrations  may  be  determined 
by  certain  colors,  which  are  visible  to  those 
having  ** Astral  Sight.''  There  is  nothing  so 
wonderful  about  this,  when  it  is  remembered 
that  the  various  *^ colors"  of  light,  comprising 
the  visible  colors  of  the  spectrum,  ranging  from 
red,  on  through  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue,  in- 
digo, and  terminating  in  violet,  arise  simply 
from  different  rates  of  vibration  of  the  Par- 
ticles of  Substance.  And  as  Thought  is  pro- 
duced by  Mind  causing  vibrations  in  the  Psy- 
choplasm,  why  is  not  the  Astral  Colors  reason- 
able? We  cannot  stop  to  consider  these  colors 
in  detail,  but  may  run  over  the  ones  correspond- 
ing to  each  marked  Emotion  of  Thought,  as  re- 
ported by  the  Occult  teachings. 

For  instance  the  shade  of  the  thought  mani- 
festing in  physical  or  organic  functions,  is  of 
a  colorless  white,  or  *^ color  of  clear  water"; 
and  the  color  of  the  thought  manifesting  in 
Fine  Force  or  Vital  Energy,  is  that  of  air, — 
heated  air  arising  from  a  furnace  or  heated 
ground — when  it  emerges  from  the  body 
although  of  a  faint  pink  when  in  the  body 
itself.  Black  represents  Hate,  Malice,  etc.; 
Gray  (bright  shade)  represents  Selfishness, 
while  Gray  of  a  dark  dull  shade  represents 
Fear.      Green    represents    Jealousy,    Deceit, 

221 


BYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Treachery,  and  similar  emotions,  ranging  from 
the  dull  shades  which  characterize  the  lower 
and  cruder  forms,  to  the  bright  shades  which 
characterize  the  finer,  or  more  delicate  forms 
of  *^Tact,''  '* Politeness,'^  ^^ Diplomacy,''  etc. 
Eed  (dull  shade)  represents  Sensuality  and 
Animal  Passion,  while  red  (bright  and  vivid) 
represents  Anger.  Crimson,  in  varying  shades, 
represents  the  phases  of  **Love."  Brown  rep- 
resents Avarice  or  Greed.  Orange  represents 
Pride  and  Ambition;  and  Yellow,  in  varying 
shades,  represents  grades  of  Intellectual  Power. 
Blue  is  the  color  of  the  Religious  thoughts, 
ranging,  however,  through  a  great  variety  of 
stages,  from  the  dull  shade  of  superstitious  re- 
ligious belief,  to  the  beautiful  violet  of  the 
highest  religious  emotion  or  thought.  What  is 
generally  known  as  ** Spirituality"  is  charac- 
terized by  a  Light  Blue  of  a  peculiarly  luminous 
shade.  Just  as  there  are  ultra-red,  and  ultra- 
violet rays  in  the  spectrum,  which  the  eye  can- 
not perceive,  so  Occultists  inform  us  there  are 
*' colors"  in  the  Aura  or  Mental  Atmosphere  of 
a  person  of  unusual  psychic  or  occult  develop- 
ment, the  ultra-violet  rays  indicating  the 
thought  of  one  who  is  pursuing  the  higher 
planes  of  occult  thought  and  unfoldment,  while 
the  ultra-red  is  evidenced  by  those  possessing 
occult  development,  but  who  are  using  the  same 

222 


THOUGHT  IN  ACTION 

for  base  and  selfish  purposes — ** black-magic'* 
in  fact.  There  are  other  shades,  known  to  Oc- 
cultists, indicating  several  highly  developed 
states  of  Mind,  but  it  is  needless  to  mention 
them  here. 

But  the  influence  of  these  Particles  of 
*' Thought-stuff '*  thrown  off  from  the  Mind 
Psychoplasm  under  the  vibrations  produced  by 
the  Mind  during  the  process  of  Thought,  does 
not  cease  with  the  phenomena  surrounding  the 
Aura.  They  are  radiated  to  a  considerable  dis- 
tance, and  produce  a  number  of  effects.  We 
will  remember  how  the  Corpuscles  or  Electrons 
are  thrown  off  by  Substance  in  a  high  state  of 
vibration.  Well,  the  same  law  manifests  in  the 
vibrations  attendant  upon  the  production  of 
Thought.  The  particles  are  thrown  off  in  great 
quantities  each  vibrating  at  the  rate  imparted 
to  it  during  the  process.  No  these  particles  of 
'* Thought-stuff '*  do  not  compose  the  ''Thought- 
waves'' — the  latter  belong  to  a  different  set  of 
phenomena. 

These  particles  of  vibrating  ''Thought- 
stuff"  fly  off  from  the  brain  of  the  thinker,  in 
all  directions,  and  affect  other  persons  who 
may  come  in  contact  with  them.  There  is  an 
important  rule  here,  however,  and  that  is  that 
they  seem  to  be  attracted  by  those  minds  which 
are   vibrating   in    similar   thought-rates   with 

233 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

themselves,  and  are  but  feebly  attracted — and 
in  some  eases,  actually  repelled — ^by  minds 
vibrating  on  opposite  lines  of  Thought.  **Like 
attracts  Like,''  in  the  Thought  World,  and 
** Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together,''  here  as 
elsewhere. 

Some  of  these  particles  of  '* Thought-stuff" 
are  still  in  existence,  and  vibrating,  which  pro- 
ceeded from  the  minds  of  persons  long  since 
dead,  the  same  being  emitted  or  thrown  off 
during  the  lifetime  of  the  persons,  however. 
Just  as  a  distant  star,  which  was  destroyed 
hundreds  of  years  ago,  may  have  emitted  rays 
which  are  only  now  reaching  our  vision,  years 
after  the  destruction  of  the  star  which  emitted 
them — and  just  as  an  odor  will  remain  in  a 
room  after  the  object  causing  it  has  departed 
the  particles  still  remaining  and  vibrating — 
and  just  as  a  stove  removed  from  a  room  may 
leave  heat  vibrations  behind  it — so  do  these 
particles  persist,  vibrate,  and  influence  other 
minds,  long  after  the  person  who  caused  them 
may  have  passed  out  of  the  body.  In  this  way, 
rooms,  houses,  neighborhoods,  and  localities 
may  vibrate  with  the  thoughts  of  people  who 
lived  there  long  ago,  but  who  have  since  passed 
away,  or  removed.  These  vibrations  affect 
people  living  in  these  places,  to  a  greater  or 
lesser  extent,  depending  upon  circumstances, 

224 


THOUGHT  IN  ACTION 

but  they  may  always  be  counteracted  or 
changed  (if  they  are  of  undesirable  nature) 
by  setting  upon  positive  vibrations  on  a  differ- 
ent plane  of  mind,  or  character  of  thought. 

The  mind  of  a  thinker  is  constantly  emitting 
or  throwing  off  these  particles  of  **  Thought- 
stuff'';  the  distance  and  rate  of  speed,  to  and 
by  which  they  travel,  being  determined  by  the 
'^force'*  used  in  their  production,  there  being 
a  great  difference  between  the  thought  of  a  vig- 
orous thinker,  and  that  emanating  from  a  weak, 
listless  mind.  These  projections  of  Thought- 
stuff  have  a  tendency  to  mingle  with  others  of 
a  corresponding  rate  of  vibration  (depending 
upon  the  character  of  the  thought.)  Some  re- 
main around  the  places  where  they  were  emit- 
ted, while  others  float  off  like  clouds,  and  obey 
the  Law  of  Attraction  which  draws  them  to  per- 
sons thinking  along  similar  lines. 

The  characteristics  of  cities  arise  in  this  way, 
the  general  average  of  Thought  of  their  in- 
habitants causing  a  corresponding  Thought- 
atmosphere  to  hang  over  and  around  it,  which 
atmosphere  is  distinctly  felt  by  visitors,  and 
often  determines  the  mental  character  of  the 
persons  residing  there,  in  spite  of  their  pre- 
vious characteristics — that  is,  unless  they  un- 
derstand the  Laws  of  Thought.  Some  neigh- 
borhoods, also,  have  their  own  peculiar  Mental 

225 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

Atmosphere,  as  all  may  have  noticed  if  they 
have  visited  certain  ^  ^  tough  ^'  neighborhoods, 
on  the  one  hand,  and  neighborhoods  of  an  op- 
posite kind,  on  the  other.  Certain  kinds  of 
Thoughts  and  Actions  seem  to  be  contagious 
in  certain  places — and  they  are  to  those  who 
do  not  understand  the  Law.  Certain  shops 
seem  to  have  their  own  atmosphere — some  re- 
flecting confidence  and  honest  dealing,  and 
others  radiating  an  atmosphere  that  causes 
patrons  to  hold  tightly  to  their  pocketbooks, 
and,  in  some  extreme  cases,  to  be  certain  that 
their  buttons  are  tightly  sewed  on  their  gar- 
ments. Yes,  places  like  people,  have  their  dis- 
tinctive Mental  Atmospheres,  and  both  arise 
from  the  same  cause. 

And  each  person  draws  to  himself  these  par- 
ticles of  vibrating  ^  ^  Thought-stuif  corre- 
sponding with  the  general  mental  attitude 
maintained  by  him.  If  one  harbors  feelings  of 
Malice,  he  will  find  thoughts  of  malice,  re- 
venge, hate,  etc.,  pouring  in  upon  him.  He  has 
made  himself  a  centre  of  Attraction,  and  has 
set  the  Law  into  operation.  His  only  safe 
course  is  to  resolutely  change  his  thought  vibra- 
tions. 

A  most  remarkable  form  of  these  particles 
of  Thought-stuff  is  evidenced  in  the  case  of 
what  are  known  among  occultists  as  ^^Thought- 

22Q 


THOUGHT  IN  ACTION 

forms/'  which  are  aggregations  of  Particles  of 
Thought-stuff  energized  by  intense  and  positive 
thought,  and  which  are  sent  out  with  such  in- 
tensity and  positiveness,  that  they  are  almost 
** vitalized/'  and  manifest  almost  the  same  de- 
gree of  mental  influence  that  would  be  mani- 
fested by  the  sender  if  he  were  present  where 
they  are.  This  highly  interesting  phase  of  the 
subject  would  take  many  chapters  to  describe 
in  detail,  and  we  must  content  ourselves  with 
a  mere  passing  view.  To  those  who  are  inter- 
ested in  the  subject,  the  writer  would  say  that 
he  purposes  considering  them  at  considerable 
length,  in  the  forthcoming  book  ^^The  Wonders 
of  The  Mind,'*  which  has  been  alluded  to  else- 
where. 

Besides  the  operation  of  these  particles  of 
Thought-stuff  emitted  during  the  production  of 
Thought,  there  are  many  other  phases  of 
Thought  Influence,  or  Thought  in  Action.  The 
principal  phase  of  this  phenomena  arises  from 
the  working  of  the  Law  of  Attraction  between 
the  respective  minds  of  different  people.  Just 
as  are  the  Particles  of  Substance  united  and 
connected  by  *^ lines''  of  connection,  so  are  the 
minds  of  Men  connected.  And  the  strong 
**puU"  of  Desire  manifests  along  these  lines, 
just  as  it  does  in  the  case  of  the  Atoms.  There 
has  been  much  written  of  recent  years  regarding 

227 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

this  '^Drawing  Power  of  the  Mind/^  and  al- 
though some  of  what  has  been  written  is  the 
veriest  rubbish  and  nonsense,  yet  under  it  all 
there  remains  a  strong,  form,  substantial  sub- 
stratum of  Fact  and  Truth.  Men  do  attract 
Success  and  Failure  to  them — people  do  attract 
things  to  them — as  strange  as  it  may  seem  to 
the  person  who  has  not  acquainted  himself  with 
the  laws  underlying  the  phenomenon. 

There  is  no  *^ miracle''  about  all  of  this — it  is 
simply  that  the  Law  of  Attraction  is  in  full 
operation,  and  that  people  of  similar  thoughts 
are  drawn  together  by  reason  thereof.  The 
workings  of  this  Law  are  somewhat  intricate, 
but  all  of  us  are  constantly  using  them,  con- 
sciously or  unconsciously.  We  draw  to  our- 
selves that  which  we  Desire  very  much,  or  that 
which  we  Fear  very  much,  for  a  Fear  is  a  Belief, 
and  acts  in  the  direction  of  actualizing  itself, 
sometimes.  But,  again,  as  Kipling  would  say: 
'*But,  that's  another  story."  This  phase  of 
the  subject  is  a  mighty  subject  in  itself,  and  *^  the 
half  has  not  been  told"  even  by  the  many  who 
have  written  of  it.  The  writer  intends  to  try 
to  remedy  the  deficiency  in  his  next  book,  how- 
ever. 

Then,  again,  the  *^ Excitement"  of  Thought, 
in  the  minds  of  people  may  be  transmitted  or 
communicated  to  the  minds  of  others,  and  a 
-     238 


THOUGHT  IN  ACTION 

similar  vibration  set  up,  under  certain  condi- 
tions, and  subject  to  certain  restraining  in- 
fluences— ^just  as  in  the  case  of  the  Particles  of 
Substances  in  a  body  or  Mass  of  Substance. 
And,  in  many  ways  that  will  suggest  themselves 
to  the  reader  who  has  mastered  the  contents  of 
the  earlier  chapters  of  this  book,  the  phenomena 
of  Dynamic  Thought  in  the  case  of  the  Atoms, 
and  Particles,  may  be,  and  are  duplicated  in  the 
case  of  Individual  Minds  of  Men. 

The  reader  will  see,  readily,  that  this  theory 
of  Dynamic  Thought,  and  the  facts  noted  in  the 
consideration  thereof,  give  an  intelligent  ex- 
planation for  the  respective  phenomena  of 
Hypnotism,  Mesmerism,  Suggestion,  Thought- 
transference,  Telepathy,  etc.,  as  well  as  of  Men- 
tal Healing,  Magnetic  Healing,  etc.,  all  of  which 
are  manfestations  of  *^ Dynamic  Thought.'' 
Not  only  do  we  see,  as  Prentice  Mulford  said, 
that  ** Thoughts  are  Things,''  but  we  may  see 
''just  why*'  they  are  Things.  And  we  may  see 
and  understand  the  laws  of  their  production 
and  operation.  This  theory  of  Dynamic 
Thought  will  throw  light  into  many  dark  cor- 
ners, and  make  plain  many  **hard  sayings" 
that  have  perplexed  you  in  the  past.  The  writer 
believes  that  it  gives  us  the  key  to  many  of  the 
great  Eiddles  of  Life. 

This  theory  has  come  to  stay.  It  is  no 
%^9 


DYNAMIC  THOUGHT 

ephemeral  tiling,  doomed  to  *^die  a-borning.'* 
It  will  be  taken  up  by  others  and  polished,  and 
added  to,  and  shaped,  and  ** decorated'' — ^but 
the  fundamental  principles  will  stand  the  stress 
of  Time  and  Men.  Of  this  the  writer  feels 
assured.  It  may  be  laughed  at  at  first,  not  only 
by  the  ^^man  on  the  street,"  but  also  by  the 
scientists.  But  it  will  outlive  this,  and  in  time 
will  come  to  its  own — perhaps  long  after  the 
writer  and  the  book  have  been  forgotten. 

This  must  be  so — for  the  idea  of  **  Dynamic 
Thought''  underlies  the  entire  Universe,  and  is 
the  cause  of  all  phenomena.  Not  only  is  all  that 
we  see  as  Life  and  Mind,  and  Substance  illustra- 
tions of  the  Law,  but  even  that  which  lies  back 
of  these  things  must  evidence  the  same  Law. 
Is  it  too  daring  a  conception  to  hazard  the 
thought  that  perhaps  the  Universe  itself  is  the 
result  of  the  Dynamic  Thought  of  The  Infinite? 

Oh,  Dynamic  Thought,  we  see  in  thee  the  in- 
strument by  which  all  Form  and  Shape  are 
created,  changed  and  destroyed — ^we  see  in  thee 
the  source  of  all  Energy,  Force  and  Motion — 
we  see  thee  Always — present  and  Everywhere 
— ^present,  and  always  in  Action.  Verily,  thou 
art  Life  in  Action.  Thou  art  the  embodiment 
of  Action  and  Motion,  of  which  Zittel  hath  said : 
''Wherever  our  eyes  dwell  on  the  Universe; 
whithersoever  we  are  carried  in  the  flight  of 

230 


THOUGHT  IN  ACTION 

thought,  everywhere  we  find  Motion/*  Suns, 
planets,  worlds,  bodies,  atoms,  and  particles, 
move,  and  act  at  thy  bidding.  Amidst  all  the 
change  of  Substance — among  the  play  of  Forces 
— and  among  and  amidst  all  that  results  there- 
from— there  art  thou,  unchanged,  and  constant. 
As  though  fresh  from  the  hand  of  The  Infinite, 
thou  hast  maintained  thy  vigor  and  strength, 
and  power,  throughout  the  aeons  of  Time.  And, 
likewise,  Space  has  no  terrors  for  thee,  for  thou 
hath  mastered  it.  Thou  art  a  symbol  of  the 
Power  of  The  Infinite — thou  art  Its  message  to 
doubting  Man ! 

Let  us  close  this  book  with  the  thought  of  the 
Greatness  of  this  Thing  that  we  call  Dynamic 
Thought — which,  great  as  it  is,  is  but  as  the 
shadow  of  the  Absolute  Power  of  The  Infinite 
One,  which  is  the  Causeless  Cause,  and  the 
Causer  of  Causes.  And  in  thus  parting  com- 
pany, reader,  let  us  murmur  the  words  of  the 
German  poet,  who  has  sung: 

**Dost  thou  ask  for  rest?    See  then  how  foolish  is  thy  desire; 

the  stern   yoke   of  motion   holds   in  harness  the  whole 

Universe. 
** Nowhere  in  this  age  canst  thou  ever  find  rest,  and  no  power 

can  deliver  thee  from  the  doom  of  Activity. 
**Rest  is  not  to  be  found  either  in  heaven  or  on  earth,  and 

from  death   and   dying  break  forth   new  growth, — new 

birth. 
**A11  the  life  of  Nature  is  an  ocean  of  Activity;  following 

on  her  footsteps,  without  ceasing,  thou  must  march  for- 
ward with  the  whole. 
'*Even  the  dark  portal  of  death  gives  thee  no  rest,  and  put 

of  thy  coflSn  will  spring  blossoms  of  a  new^lii^n.d'tf A  H  v^- 

FINIS.  /^      O-  TH£  \ 

231  *  i  UNIVERSITY  j 


SUCCESS-THOUGHT 


HE  desire  of  every  reader  is  to  get,  hot 
from  his  pen,  all  that  a  progressive  writer 
has  to  say.  Headers  of  this  book  will  be 
interested  in  knowing  that  Mr.  William 
Walker  Atkinson  is  on  the  regular  edi- 
torial staff  of  The  Segnogram,  and  that 
the  choicest  of  his  *'I  Can  and  I  WilP' 
preachments  are  appearing  in  each  issue  of  that  mag- 
azine. 

The  Segnogram  is  a  monthly  magazine  for  Suc- 
cess— Thought  Thinkers  and  Eeaders.  It  has  one 
mission  to  fill — the  upbuilding — the  betterment  of 
man.  It  has  no  time  to  quarrel  with  any  creed,  sect, 
doctrine  or  belief.  The  Law  of  Love  is  its  controlling 
influence — it  has  none  other.  To  read  it  is  to  be 
imbued  with  its  high  teachings.  It  is  a  Success  Maga- 
zine that  teaches  how  to  win  Success  without  preach- 
ing about  it.  It  believes  in  doing  things,  because  in 
doing  things  we  win  Success. 

Do  you  desire  to  come  in  with  usf  Do  you  want 
to  join  our  circle  of  thousands  of  Success  readers? 
Do  you  want  to  get  the  cream  of  Success — thought? 
If  so  you  must  not  lag  behind.  Keep  to  the  front 
by  keeping  in  touch  with  Mr.  Atkinson  and  his  co- 
workers, Messrs.  A.  Victor  Segno  and  H.  M.  Walker. 
The  price  of  the  magazine  is  50  cents  a  year,  five 
cents  the  copy.  Write  for  sample  copy  if  you  never 
have  seen  it. 


ADDRESS 

The  Segnogram  Publishing  Co* 

LOS  ANGELES,  CAL. 


XA/,Y^g 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 
NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1  -year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

NOV  2  9  2000 

.qPNITOMIII 


ncT  2  6  ?nn^ 


U.C.  BERKELEY 


12,000(11/95) 


>c-^<2o^^Se-^oc 


Y b  279 1 8 


Ilili 


